Contents

CONTENTS ...................................................................................................... 0
Chapter One System Configuration ....................................................................................... 2
Customer Management System Parameters......................................................................................... 4
Customers Types ........................................................................................................................ 48
Customers Degrees ..................................................................................................................... 49
Customers Grades Evaluation Criteria .............................................................................................. 51
Customers Classifications .............................................................................................................. 52
Representatives Types ................................................................................................................. 53
Collectors Types ......................................................................................................................... 54
Marketeer Types ......................................................................................................................... 55
Marketeer Levels Codes ............................................................................................................... 56
Payment Cards Group .................................................................................................................. 57
Payment Cards Types .................................................................................................................. 59
Payment Cards Data .................................................................................................................... 61
Types of Notes Requests .............................................................................................................. 63
Notes Types............................................................................................................................... 64
Sales Invoices Types ................................................................................................................... 65
Sales Returns Requests Types ....................................................................................................... 67
Sales Returns Types .................................................................................................................... 68
Receipt Vouchers Types ............................................................................................................... 70
Sales Returns Reasons ................................................................................................................ 71
Customers Commissions Coding ..................................................................................................... 72
Representatives Commissions Coding .............................................................................................. 80
Representative Persons Collection Calculation.................................................................................... 88
Collectors Commissions Coding ...................................................................................................... 92
Employees Commissions Coding..................................................................................................... 97
Marketeers Commissions Coding ................................................................................................... 103
Coupons Types.......................................................................................................................... 109
Discount Card Types ................................................................................................................... 113
Customers Management System General Coding ............................................................................... 115
Compensation Quantity Coding ...................................................................................................... 117
Sales Contracts Types................................................................................................................. 121
Sales Contracts Terms Coding ...................................................................................................... 122
Marketeers Data ........................................................................................................................ 125
Customers Groups...................................................................................................................... 129
Collectors Data .......................................................................................................................... 132
Sales Representatives Data .......................................................................................................... 134
Drivers Data .............................................................................................................................. 145
 Routes Data .............................................................................................................................. 148
Open Account Request ................................................................................................................ 149
Customers Data ......................................................................................................................... 155
Customers Grades Evaluation ....................................................................................................... 176
Customer Opening Balances ......................................................................................................... 178
Medical Network Data ................................................................................................................. 180
Insurance Beneficiaries ................................................................................................................ 182
Insurance Items Group ................................................................................................................ 184
Insurers Data ............................................................................................................................ 186
Member Insurance Data ............................................................................................................... 194
Coupon Data ............................................................................................................................. 198
Loyalty Program Coding ............................................................................................................... 201
Loyalty Cards ............................................................................................................................ 205
Loyalty Program Transactions ....................................................................................................... 209
Cash Customers Group ............................................................................................................... 212
Cash Customers Data ................................................................................................................. 213
Chapter Three System Transactions .................................................................................. 217
Customers Notifications Requests .................................................................................................. 219
Customers Notifications ............................................................................................................... 225
Customer Notifications - Multi ....................................................................................................... 231
Request Granting Compensation Quantity ........................................................................................ 235
Due Sales Invoices ..................................................................................................................... 238
Settle Customers Installments ....................................................................................................... 240
Promissory Note ........................................................................................................................ 243
Settling Promissory Notes............................................................................................................. 246
Indebtedness Scheduling.............................................................................................................. 248
Sales Invoice Follow-up............................................................................................................... 251
Customers Claims ...................................................................................................................... 253
Follow Up Insurers Claims ............................................................................................................ 257
Representatives Commission Calculation ......................................................................................... 259
Sales Contracts ......................................................................................................................... 263
Distribute Coupons to Representatives ............................................................................................ 273
Return Coupons from Representatives............................................................................................. 276
Coupons Sales .......................................................................................................................... 279
Link Invoice to Loyalty Customer .................................................................................................... 283
Approve Override Discounts Requests ............................................................................................. 284
Chapter Four Reports ..................................................................................................... 286
Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Introduction
Customers Management System is one of the systems that operate as
part of the Onyx Pro ERP, which was developed to fulfill the needs of a
wide variety of organizations regardless of their specializations or
activities. It provides smart advanced solutions that help keep up with
the rapid developments in the information technology industry. This
includes having a customized system that fits customers’ needs and
which can be specially configured through a set of parameters, general
determinants, and basic inputs data as well as activities-related
transactions that process the system inputs to yield various outputs
covering different customers' work fields and provide real opportunities
for the organization to improve customers’ management experience.
Customers Management System user guide includes systematic
instructions on how to use each field across the system screens. It
clarifies the function of every field as well as the data they include and
demonstrates the effects of available options as well as general
parameters on calculation methods and transactions handled by the
system.

Enterprise Resource Planning 1 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Chapter One System

Configuration

Enterprise Resource Planning 2 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Introduction
Customer management system configuration is the set of parameters
and determinants through which users could customize both the
customer and sales management systems according to the policies an
organization follows when handling customers.

Enterprise Resource Planning 3 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customer Management System Parameters

Use: This screen is one of the key screens in the customer management system. It
includes multiple parameters that reflects the policies and requirements of an organization
within both the customer and sales management fields. Here, users can use the available
options to configure the system parameters in a way that fulfills the organization’s needs
and future goals. Therefore, users should pay close attention when filling in the necessary
data herein.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users will need to click the Modify button, and then follow
the steps illustrated below:
First: Customer Management Parameters
- Customer Number Length: In this field, the user specifies the maximum length
allowed for the customer number within the customer data. For example, if the user
enters 9, the customer number in the Customer Data screen should contain nine digits
or letters.
Remark: The system does not allow users to modify the customer
number length after entering data in the Customers Data screen.
- Customer Number Type: In this field, the user determines the type of customer
number, whether Numerical or Alphanumeric. If the selected option is Numerical, the
system will automatically generate the customer number sequencing. If the selected
option is Alphanumeric, the user will need to enter the sequence manually.

Enterprise Resource Planning 4 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Show Date: Through this parameter, the user could control how the date will be shown
in the transactions’ screens by selecting one of the following options; Automatic Can
Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.
- Use Numbers of Deleted Documents: When this parameter is activated, the system
allows users to use the numbers of deleted documents. Otherwise, the serial numbers
of the deleted documents will be held within the system and not be allowed in the
auditing process.
- Fix Template: Activating this parameter allows the user to fix some of the basic data
in documents, including the date, payment method, and description provided that they
do not log out of the screen.
- Fix Pricing Level for Customer in Sales: Activating this parameter allows users to fix
certain pricing levels for both cash and on-credit sales at the customer level within the
Customers Data screen. However, if this applies, users will not be able to modify the
pricing level later in the sales invoice.
- Use Sales Invoices with a Goods Out Note:
 If this parameter is not activated: Both the inventory and the accounts related to
the general ledger; whether customer or revenue accounts will be affected once the
sales invoice is issued on the system.
 If this parameter is activated: Another screen called Sales Invoice Issuance
Note appears and two types of effects are rendered:
▪ A financial effect that is rendered once the sales invoice is issued.
▪ An inventory effect that is rendered once the sales invoice issuance note is
selected, which allows users to provide goods from warehouses in batches.
- Use Sales Revenue Intermediary Account: This parameter appears when the Use
Sales Invoices with a Goods Out Note parameter is activated, and when activated, it
allows the system to use an intermediary account for the sales revenue, which is then
credited with the invoice amount rather than the sales revenue. This applies if the
organization decides not to affect the sales revenues directly. However, when a
goods-out note is issued, the entry is reversed automatically.
- Use Multiple Warehouses: This parameter helps the user determine how the
warehouses’ data will be handled across different customer and sales–related

Enterprise Resource Planning 5 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

transactions screens. Once this parameter is activated, the system allows the user to
include the data of multiple warehouses, within the Detailed Data section of the
screens at the item level. Otherwise, the system will allow the user to enter the data of
a single warehouse only for every transaction within the Warehouse field in the Master
Data section.
- Use Multiple Warehouses in Quotations: This parameter helps the user determine
how the warehouses’ data will be handled in the sales transactions made in the
Quotations screen. Once this parameter is activated, the system allows the user to
include the data of multiple warehouses at the item level. Otherwise, they will be able
to enter the data of a single warehouse only for each document.
- Reference Number is Mandatory: If this parameter is activated, the user will need to
enter a reference number in all sales documents before saving any transaction.
Otherwise, the system will not allow saving.
- Description Is Mandatory: If this parameter is activated, the user will need to enter a
description in all sales documents before saving the transaction. Otherwise, the system
will not allow saving.
- Post Sales Revenues at Net Value: Activating this parameter allows the user to enter
the sale revenues at the net value; in other words, after deducting the allowed
discount. Otherwise, the system records the total revenues in addition to the allowed
discount and then posts the allowed discount amount to the designated account that is
determined within the Link Stock Accounts to General Ledger screen.
- Display Description at Item Level: Activating this parameter allows the system to
display a Description column in the sales transactions screens where the user could
enter the description at the item level.
- Sales Return to Same Warehouse: Activating this parameter allows the system to
deliver the sale returns to the same warehouse from which the purchase is made
based on the sales invoice.
- Use Work Order System: Activating this parameter allows the user to include a work
order system within the sales system. Thus, another two parameters; Use Receipt
Vouchers and Work Orders Sequence appear, and two screens, Work Orders and

Enterprise Resource Planning 6 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Work Orders Types are included within the Sales Management System where work
orders are used in maintenance transactions and fetched to both invoices and returns.
- Use Receipt Vouchers: When the Use Work Orders parameter is activated, this
parameter appears and once activated, it allows the system to display the Receipt
Vouchers Sequence parameter, Receipt and Inspection Voucher screen, where the
user could monitor the equipment receipt process before implementation. This applies
when the user fetches the equipment’s data to the Work Order screen so that they
could monitor the transaction from receipt to delivery.
- Use Free-of-Charge Quantities: When this parameter is activated, the system allows
the user to sell free-of-charge quantities (Bonus) by generating a separate column
where the user could enter the free-of-charge quantities that are determined in the
sales invoice. In addition to this, another two parameters, Post Free of Charge
Quantity Cost to Free of Charge Quantities Account and Sales FOC Calculation
Method appear within the system parameters screen.
- Post Free-of-Charge Quantity Cost to Free-of-Charge Quantities Account:
Activating this parameter allows the system to post the cost of the free-of-charge
quantities to a separate account for auditing noting that this separate account needs to
be determined within the Link Stock Accounts to General Ledger screen under the
inventory system inputs. Thus, the resulting accounting entry will be as follows:
Date Description Debit Credit
From/ Sales Cost (Free-of-charge Quantity) Account xx
Invoice Date To/ Inventory Account xx
Free-of-charge Quantity Cost in Sales Invoice

Hint: If the Post Free-of-Charge Quantity Cost to Free-of-Charge Quantities

Account is not activated, the system will post the cost of the free-of-charge
quantity to the inventory cost account of the concerned warehouse group.
- Hide Item % from FOC in Invoice: When this parameter is activated, the system hides from
the sales invoice the free-of-charge quantity percentage that has been previously determined in the
Items Data screen when the Allow Free-of-Charge Quantity parameter is activated. Otherwise, the
free-of-charge quantity percentage appears normally in the invoice.
- Display Free of Charge Quantity Percentage in Sales Return: This parameter
appears if the selected option in the Sales FOC Calculation Method parameter field is

Enterprise Resource Planning 7 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Not Used and when activated, it directs the system to display the free quantity
percentage in the sales returns.
- Reduce Selling Price in Return Invoice Based on FOC Qtys: Activating this
parameter helps users -especially those working in the pharmaceutical field- add sale
returns to a sales invoice that includes free quantities. This way, the system divides the
total invoice value by total invoice quantity + the free quantity and the resulting value
will be the price that is approved for the return.
- Use Discount at Items' Level: Activating this parameter, allows the user to determine
and apply the discount at the item’s level in the Discount column that appears in the
sales transactions. In addition to this, it allows the system to show the Item Discount
Type, Numbers of Discounts, and Sales Discount Types parameters within the
parameters screen.
- Hide Item Discount % Automatically from Invoice: When this parameter is activated,
the system hides from the sales invoice the discount percentage that is determined in
the Items Data when the Allow Discount - Sales parameter is activated. Otherwise,
the item discount percentage appears normally in the sales invoice.
- Fetching Additional Discounts from Additional Discount Requests is Mandatory:
If this parameter is activated, the user will not be able to apply any additional discounts
before entering them in the Additional Discount Request screen and having them
approved. Otherwise, the user can apply the additional discounts from the Additional
Discounts screen directly.
- Calculate Discount at Invoice Level from Total Price after Items Discount:
Activating this parameter allows the system to apply the additional discounts offered on
a certain invoice total independent of any prior discount that is applied at the item level
within the Detailed Data section.
- Check Item Discount Within Items Data: This parameter appears when the user selects
any option that is related to a warehouse group from the list of options provided in the
Sales Discounts Types parameter and when activated, it directs the system to check
whether the Allow Discount - Sales parameter is activated in the Items Data screen for
the selected item.

Enterprise Resource Planning 8 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Link to General Ledger: Activating this parameter allows the user to link customers'
accounts to the general ledger using one of the following options:
 Multiple Accounts: When the user selects this option, the system creates a
separate detail (sub) account for each customer under the main customers’
account in the chart of accounts.
 Accounts Group: When the user selects this option, the system creates an
account for the customers' group in the chart of accounts. Afterward, the user can
link the customers that are defined in the Customers Data screen, each to their
concerned group.
- Decimal Places: In this field, the user determines the number of decimal places to
which the amounts of transactions in both the customers and sales systems should be
rounded.
- Customers Sequence Type: This parameter allows the user to determine the
customers' sequencing upon defining them in the Customers Data screen using the
following options:
 General: When the user selects this option, the system generates one sequence
for all customers.
 By Group: When the user selects this option, the system generates for each
customer group a unique sequencing.
 By Group and Type: When the user selects this option, the system determines the
customers’ sequencing based on the customer group and type. If either of them
changes, then the customer numbers sequence changes accordingly.
- Document Sequence: Through this parameter, the user could determine how the
sequence of documents will appear on the system screens using one of the provided
options, Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.
- Sales Invoices Sequence/ Sales Returns Invoices Sequence: These are key
parameters that users should handle carefully to determine how the sequencing of both
the sales invoices and the sales return invoices will appear on the system, noting that
they will not be able to modify the selected sequencing after the invoice is issued.
These parameters include the following options:

Enterprise Resource Planning 9 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Accumulative: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to create a
single sequence for all types of invoices regardless of the selected payment
method, warehouse, or type.
 By Payment Method: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to
create a unique invoice sequencing for every payment method; noting that the user
can repeat a certain number, for example number 1 four times to indicate a
different payment method.
 By Cost Centers: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to
create a unique invoice sequencing based on the selected cost center. In addition,
in case multiple cost centers exist, each will have a unique invoice sequencing
regardless of the selected payment method or type.
 By Warehouse: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to create
a unique invoice sequencing based on the selected warehouse. And, in case
multiple warehouses exist, each will have a unique invoice sequencing regardless
of the selected payment method, cost center, or type.
 By Warehouse and Payment Method: When this option is selected, the system
allows the user to create the invoices’ sequencing based on the selected
warehouse and payment method. This way, every related warehouse and payment
method will have a unique invoice sequencing. For example, warehouse number 1,
which is related to the cash payment method, will have an invoice sequencing that
is different from that of warehouse number 1, which is related to the credit payment
method, and so on.
 By Center and Payment Method: When this option is selected, the system allows
the user to generate the invoices sequencing based on the selected center and
payment method. This way, every related center and payment method will have a
unique invoice sequencing. For example, cost center number 1, which is related to
the cash payment method will have an invoice sequencing that is different from that
of center number 1, which is related to the credit payment method, and so on.
 By Type: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to generate the
invoices sequencing based on the type of invoice that is selected from the list of
types defined in the Sales Invoices Types screen. This way each type of invoice

Enterprise Resource Planning 10 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

will have a unique sequence regardless of the selected payment method, cost
center, or warehouse.
 By Type and Warehouse: When this option is selected, the system allows the
user to generate the invoices sequencing based on the selected type of invoice and
warehouse. This way, every related type and warehouse will have a unique invoice
sequencing.
 By Type, Warehouse and Payment Method: When this option is selected, the
system allows the user to generate the invoices sequencing based on the selected
type, warehouse, and payment method. This way the Wholesale invoice type that
is related to warehouse number 1 and the cash payment method, for example, will
have an invoice sequencing that is different from the Wholesale invoice type that is
related to warehouse number 1 and the credit payment method, and so on.
 By Type and Payment Method: When this option is selected, the system allows
the user to generate the invoices sequencing based on the selected type and
payment method. This way, the Wholesale invoice type, that is related to the cash
payment method, for example, will have an invoice sequencing that is different from
that of the Wholesale invoice type, which is related to the credit payment method,
and so on.
 General: Users select this option for electronic invoices; whether sales or return
invoices. It represents an accumulative sequence that the system generates across
all branches, while, the previously mentioned Accumulative option represents an
accumulative sequence that the system generates at the branch level.
- Sales Invoices Additional Discounts Sequence/ Additional Discounts Requests/
Quotations Sequence/ Customers Orders Sequence: These parameters help the
user determine how the system will handle the concerned sequences by selecting one
of the following options as follows:
 Accumulative: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to
generate one sequencing for all documents.
 By Type: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to generate the
documents’ sequencing based on the types of the documents, which are previously

Enterprise Resource Planning 11 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

defined in the concerned Documents Types screens. This way, each type in case
multiple types exist, will have a unique sequencing.
 General: When this option is used, the system uses a general sequencing to refer
to the electronic invoices; either in notes or note requests. This is an accumulative
sequence that the system generates across all branches, while, the previously
mentioned Accumulative option represents an accumulative sequence that the
system generates at the branch level.
- Receipt Vouchers Sequence: This parameter appears once the Use Receipt
Vouchers parameter is activated. It includes the following options:
 Accumulative: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to
generate a single sequencing for all customers’ requests’ documents.
 By Type: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to generate a
unique sequencing for each of the types that have been previously defined in the
Receipt Vouchers Types screen.
- Work Orders Sequence: This parameter appears once the Use Work Order System
parameter is activated. It includes the following options:
 Accumulative: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to
generate a single sequencing for all customers’ requests’ documents.
 By Type: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to generate a
unique sequencing for each of the work orders types that have been previously
defined within the Work Orders Types screen.
- Cost Center/ Project/ Activity Type: These parameters could be used when the cost
center, project, and activities parameters are activated within the General Parameters
screen under System Configuration. They include multiple options from which the
user could select to determine how the system will handle the cost centers, projects, or
activities within the sales screens as follows:
 Unused: Selecting this option directs the system to not include any centers,
projects, or activities in transactions.
 Single: When this option is selected, the system displays, in the Master Data
section of the Sales screen, a single field for each cost center, project, or activity.

Enterprise Resource Planning 12 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Multiple: When this option is selected, the system displays in the Detailed Data
section of the Sales screen a column where the user could enter the data of the
center, project, or activity at the item level.
- Sales FOC Calculation Method: This parameter appears once the Use Free
Quantities parameter is activated. Here, the user selects one of the provided options
to determine how the system should apply the free-of-charge quantity to the sales
invoices automatically, noting that the user needs to code the free-of-charge quantity
on sales within the Incentive Coding – Free Quantities screen under Sales
Configuration. Thus, the system changes the fields that appear accordingly. These
options include:
 Unused: The user selects this option if they don’t want to apply the free-of-charge
quantities on sales, and in this case, they will need to manually determine the free-
of-charge within the Sales screen so that it could be posted to the FOC quantities
sales account.
 Items: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantities are recorded
within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen under Sales Configuration
based on the items that are defined in the Items Data screen. Then, once the
sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-charge quantity is automatically
fetched to the Free of Charge Quantity field in the invoice depending.
 Warehouse Group: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantities are
recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen under Sales
Configuration based on the warehouse group that is defined in the Main Groups
Data screen. Then, once the sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-
charge quantity, whether Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched to the
Free of Charge Quantity field in the invoice.
 Customer Type: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantities are
recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen under Sales
Configuration based on the types of customers that are defined in the Customers
Types screen. Then, once the sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-
charge quantity, whether Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched to the
Free of Charge Quantity field in the invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 13 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Customer Type and Warehouse Group: When this option is selected, the free-
of-charge quantities are recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities
screen under Sales Configuration based on both the type of customer and
warehouse group that are defined in the Customers Types and Main Groups
Data screens. Then, once the sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-
charge quantity, whether Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched to the
Free of Charge Quantity field in the invoice.
 Customer Type and Item: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge
quantities are recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen
under Sales Configuration based on both the type of customer and item that are
previously defined within the Customers Types and Items Data screens. Then,
once the sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-charge quantity, whether
in the form of a Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched to the Free of
Charge Quantity field in the invoice.
 Customer: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantities are
recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen under Sales
Configuration based on the customer that is defined in the Customers Data
screen. Then, once the sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-charge
quantity, whether in the form of a Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched
to the Free of Charge Quantity field in the invoice.
 Customer and Warehouse Group: When this option is selected, the free-of-
charge quantities are recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities
screen under Sales Configuration based on the selected customer and warehouse
group. Then, once the sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-charge
quantity, whether in the form of a Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched
to the Free of Charge Quantity field in the invoice.
 Customer and Item: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantities
are recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen under Sales
Configuration based on both the selected customer and item. Then, once the
sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-charge quantity, whether in the form

Enterprise Resource Planning 14 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

of a Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched to the Free of Charge

Quantity field in the invoice.
 Items and Invoice Type: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge
quantities are recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen
under Sales Configuration based on the selected item and invoice type that are
previously defined in the Items Data and Invoices Types screens. Then, once the
sales invoice is issued, the determined free-of-charge quantity, whether in the form
of a Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched to the Free of Charge
Quantity field in the invoice.
 Item and Quantity: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantities are
recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities screen under Sales
Configuration based on the quantity and selected item that is previously defined in
the Items Data screen. This applies in the form of previously defined segment. For
example, the first segment allows customers who purchase 1 to 20 pieces of a
specific item to have 3 free-of-charge pieces of that same item. The second
segment allows customers who purchase 21 to 30 pieces of a specific item to have
5 free-of-charge pieces of the same item. Then, once the sales invoice is issued,
the specified free-of-charge quantity, whether as a Percentage or Quantity, is
automatically fetched to the Free of Charge Quantity field in the invoice.
 Item, Quantity and Payment Method: When this option is selected, the free-of-
charge quantities are recorded within the Incentive Coding - Free Quantities
screen under Sales Configuration based on item, quantity, and payment method.
This applies in the form of previously defined segments. For example, the first
segment allows customers who purchase 1 to 20 pieces of a specific item in Cash
to have 5 free-of-charge pieces of the same item yet allows customers who
purchase 1 to 20 pieces of the same item on Credit to have only 3 free-of-charge
pieces. Then, once the sales invoice is issued, the specified free-of-charge
quantity, whether a Percentage or Quantity, is automatically fetched to the Free
Of Charge Quantity field in the invoice.
- FOC Calculation per Warehouse: This parameter appears when the user selects any
of the options included in the Sales FOC Calculation Method parameter other than

Enterprise Resource Planning 15 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

the Unused option. It allows the system to calculate the free-of-charge quantities for a
particular warehouse using one of the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantity is calculated for
all warehouses.
 Warehouses: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantity is
calculated at the warehouse level.
 By Warehouses Group: When this option is selected, the free-of-charge quantity
is calculated at the warehouse group level.
- FOC Calculation per Period: This parameter appears when the user selects any of
the options included in the Sales FOC Calculation Method parameter other than the
Unused option. It allows the system to calculate the free-of-charge quantities per
period determined between the two dates specified in the From Date and To Date
columns in the Incentive Coding – Free Quantities screen and incase the invoice
date lies outside the specified period; the system will not apply the free-of-charge
grant.
- Item Discount Type: This parameter appears when the Use Discount at Items’
Level parameter is activated. It allows the user to determine the type of discount that
will be applied using one of the provided options; whether Amount, Percentage, or
Amount and Percentage.
- Number of Discounts: This parameter appears when the Use Discount at Items’
Level parameter is activated. It allows the user to determine the number of discounts
that will appear in the sales invoice by selecting one of the provided options; whether
One, Two, or Three.
Hint: All discounts are posted to the Allowed Discount Account if the
Post Sales Revenues at Net Value parameter is not activated.
- Sales Discounts Types: This parameter appears when the Use Discount at Items’
Level parameter is activated. It allows the user to determine how the discount will
apply to the sales. This step affects the fields displayed on the Discount Coding
screen found under sales configuration depending on the option that the user selects
as follows:

Enterprise Resource Planning 16 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Unused: When this option is selected, the system applies the discount determined
in the items data.
 Items: When this option is selected, then the discount amount should be
determined for each item in the Discount Coding screen, and upon issuing a sales
invoice, the system will automatically fetch the discount (whether amount or
percentage) at the item level to transactions screens.
 Warehouse Group: When this option is selected, the user will need to determine
the discount amount by warehouse group in the Discount Coding screen.
Similarly, upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the
discount (whether amount or percentage) to the Discount field at the item level in
the transactions’ screens based on the selected warehouse group.
 Customer Type: When this option is selected, the user will need to determine the
discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the customer type that
is defined in the Customers Types screen. Similarly, upon issuing a sales invoice,
the system will automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage or amount) to
the Discount field at the item level in the transactions screens based on the
selected customer type.
 Customer Type and Warehouse Group: When this option is selected, the user
will need to determine the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based
on the selected customer type and warehouse group. Similarly, upon issuing a
sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage
or amount) to the Discount field at the item level in the transactions screens based
on the selected customer type and warehouse group.
 Customer Type and Item: When this option is selected, the user will need to
determine the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the
customer type and item previously defined in the Customers Types and Items
Data screens. Similarly, upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically
fetch the discount (whether percentage or amount) to the Discount field at the item
level in the transactions screens based on the selected customer type and item.
 Customer: When this option is selected, the user will need to determine the
discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the customer previously

Enterprise Resource Planning 17 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

defined in the Customers Types screen. Similarly, upon issuing a sales invoice,
the system will automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage or amount) to
the Discount field at the item level in the transactions screens based on the
selected customer.
 Customer and Warehouse Group: When this option is selected, the user will
need to determine the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on
the customer and warehouse group previously defined in the Customers Types
and Main Groups Data screens. Similarly, upon issuing a sales invoice, the
system will automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage or amount) to the
Discount field at the item level in the transactions screens based on the selected
customer and warehouse group.
 Customer and Item: When this option is selected, the discount amount is
determined in the Discount Coding screen based on the customer and item
previously defined in the Customers Types and Items Data screens. And
similarly, upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the
discount (whether percentage or amount) to the Discount field at the item level in
the transactions screens based on the selected customer and item.
 Item and Pricing Level: When this option is selected, the discount amount is
determined in the Discount Coding screen based on the item and pricing level
previously defined in the Items Data and Pricing Levels screens. Similarly, upon
issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the discount (whether
percentage or value) to the Discount field at the item level in the transactions
screens based on the selected item and invoice.
 Item and Quantity: When this option is selected, the discount amount is
determined in the Discount Coding screen based on the item that is defined in the
Items Data screen, and the quantities segments. For Example, if the customer
buys from 1 to 20 pieces (first quantity segment) of a specific item they will be
eligible to a discount of 1,000. If the customer buys from 21 to 30 pieces (second
quantity segment) of a specific item they will be eligible to a discount of 1,500, and
so on. Thus, upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the

Enterprise Resource Planning 18 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

discount (whether percentage or value) to the Discount field at the item level in the
transactions screens based on the selected item and quantity.
 Item, Quantity and Payment Method: When this option is selected, the user will
need to enter the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the
item that is defined in the Items Data screen, the quantities segments and the
selected payment method. For Example, if the customer buys from 1 to 20 pieces
(first quantity segment) of a specific item in Cash they will be eligible to a discount
of 1,000. If the customer buys the same quantity of the same item On credit, they
will be eligible to a discount of 500. Upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will
automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage or value) to the Discount field
at the item level in the transactions screens based on the selected item, quantity,
and payment method.
 Item, Pricing Level and Batch Number: When this option is selected, the user
will need to enter the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on
the item, pricing level, and batch number that are previously defined in the Items
Data, Pricing Levels, and Batch Numbers Creation Methods. Thus, upon issuing
a sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the discount (whether
percentage or value) to the Discount field at the item level in the transactions
screens based on the selected item, pricing level, and batch number.
 Item and Branch: When this option is selected, the user will need to enter the
discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the item and branch
that are previously defined in the Items Data and Branches Data screens. Thus,
upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the discount
(whether percentage or value) to the Discount field at the item level in the
transactions screens based on the selected item and branch.
 Item, Pricing Level and Branch: When this option is selected, the user will need
to enter the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the item,
pricing level, and branch that are previously defined in the Items Data, Pricing
Levels, and Branches Data screens. Thus, upon issuing a sales invoice, the
system will automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage or value) to the

Enterprise Resource Planning 19 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Discount field at the item level in the transactions screens based on the selected
item, pricing level, and branch.
 Customer, Warehouse Group and Pricing Level: When this option is selected,
the user will need to enter the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen
based on the customer, warehouse group, and pricing level previously defined in
the Customers Data, Main Groups Data, and Pricing Levels screens. Thus,
upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically fetch the discount
(whether percentage or value) to the Discount field at the item level in the
transactions screens based on the selected the customer, warehouse group, and
pricing level.
 Item, Customer and Pricing Level: When this option is selected, the user will
need to enter the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the
customer, item, and pricing level previously defined in the Customers Data, Items
Data, and Pricing Levels screens. Thus, upon issuing a sales invoice, the system
will automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage or value) to the Discount
field at the item level in the transactions screens based on the selected customer,
item, and pricing level.
 Customer Type and Payment Method: When this option is selected, the user will
need to enter the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on the
customer type previously defined in the Customers Data screen and the selected
payment method. Thus, upon issuing a sales invoice, the system will automatically
fetch the discount (whether percentage or value) to the Discount field at the item
level in the transactions screens based on the selected customer type and payment
method.
 Customers Group, Item and Pricing Level: When this option is selected, the user
will need to enter the discount amount in the Discount Coding screen based on
the customers group, item, and pricing level. Thus, upon issuing a sales invoice,
the system will automatically fetch the discount (whether percentage or value) to
the Discount field at the item level in the transactions screens based on the
selected customers group, item, and pricing level.

Enterprise Resource Planning 20 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Warehouses Discount Types: This parameter appears when the user selects any of
the options included in the Sales Discounts Types parameter other than the Unused
option. It allows the system to apply discounts based on selected warehouses
according to the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, the system applies a general discount to all
warehouses.
 Warehouses: When this option is selected, the system applies the discount to
each warehouse separately.
 By Warehouses Group: When this option is selected, the system applies the
discount to each warehouse group.
- Post Additional Discount by Item To: With the help of this parameter, the user can
post the additional discount defined in the Additional Discounts screen of sales
invoices using one of the following options:
 Allowed Discount Account: When this option is selected, the system posts the
discount granted to the customer to the Allowed Discount Account that is
determined in the Link Stock Accounts to General Ledger screen.
 Additional Discount Account Selected in Screen: When this option is selected,
the user will be able to determine in the Customer Notifications screen the
account to which the additional discount will be posted.
- Rounding Fractions: With the help of this parameter, the user can determine how the
fractions will be handled on the system using one of the following options:
 Unused: If this option is selected, fractions will not be rounded and appear as is
after the decimal places.
 Auto Add Fractions to Discount: If this option is selected, the system will add the
fractions to the discount automatically.
 Add Fractions Less Than 0.5 As Discount and Higher as Charge: If this option
is selected, the system will add fractions less than 0.5 as discount and fractions
greater than 0.5 as a charge on the organization noting that if the third decimal
number after the integer is less the 0.5, it is rounded to zero. If it is more than 0.5,
it will be rounded to 0.5 only.

Enterprise Resource Planning 21 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Use Discount by Period: This parameter appears when the user selects any of the
options included in the Sales Discounts Types parameter other than the Unused
option. It allows the system to calculate discounts per period determined between the
two dates specified in the From Date and To Date columns in the Discounts Coding
screen and incase the invoice date lies outside the specified period; the system will not
approve the discount.
Second: Advanced Options (1)

- Exceed Customer Request Quantity in Sales Invoice: Activating this parameter

allows the user to increase the requested quantity upon fetching the customer request
to the sales invoice.
- Approve Purchase Order Quantity in Customers' Orders: Activating this parameter
allows the user to add the unprocessed purchase order quantity to the quantity
available in warehouses when checking the request quantity in the customers’
requests.
- Use Reservation Dates in Customers’ Requests: Activating this parameter allows
the system to process the reservation dates determined in the customer request within
the To Date, From Time and To Time columns at the item level so that the
reservation is made with a specific time and date.
- Auto Approve Customer Request Number as Batch Number for Item: This
parameter appears when the Link Customer Requests to Goods Received

Enterprise Resource Planning 22 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

parameter is activated. It allows the system to automatically fill in the batch number
field with the same request number for all items.
- Do not Fetch Unavailable Quantities from Orders to Invoice: When this parameter
is activated, the system prevents the user from fetching the items that are not available
in the warehouses to the sales invoice when preparing the customer request.
- Allow Customer to Order UN Stocked Items: When this parameter is activated, the
system is allowed to display both available and unavailable items in warehouses within
the Customers Requests screen. Otherwise, the system will only display the items
that are available in the warehouse.
- Customer Request Expiry Date is Mandatory: If this parameter is activated, the user
will have to determine an expiry date for the customer request, and in case the invoice
issuance date is determined after the expiry date of the request, the system prevents
the user from fetching the request to the sales invoice.
- Quotation Expiry Date is Mandatory: If this parameter is activated, the user will have
to determine an expiry date for the entered quotation in the Quotations screen. This
way, when the quotation exceeds the selected expiry date, the system prevents the
user from fetching it to the sales invoice.
- Check Below-cost Pricing and Selling Limits for Customer Request in Invoice:
This parameter appears when the selected option in the Fetch Prices from
Customers Requests to Sales Invoice parameter is Fetch Request Price. It ensures
that the price of the request fetched to the invoice matches the predetermined pricing
limits and item cost and prevents the user from exceeding them unless they have the
privilege to do so.
- Modify Warehouse Number Of Customer Request in Sales Invoice: Activating this
parameter allows the user to modify -directly in the sales invoice- the warehouse
number that is predetermined in the customer request when it is automatically fetched.
- Modify Payment Method of Customer Request in Sales Invoice: Activating this
parameter allows the user to modify -directly in the sales invoice- the payment method
that is predetermined in the customer request when it is automatically fetched from
Customer Requests screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 23 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Link Customers Requests to Goods Received: This parameter is particularly helpful

for departments that require fetching customer requests to the goods received orders.
It allows the system to automatically fetch the customer request to the goods received
order so that quantity determined in the goods received order is directly rendered in
related sales invoice.
- Check Credit Limit and Credit Period in Customer Requests: This parameter allows
the system when the user prepare a request for a certain customer to ensure that this
customer does not exceed the allowed credit limit that is determined in the Limits
Setup screen. In other words, the system checks whether the customer has any
unpaid debts and if this is the case, it prevents the user from completing the customer
request. In addition, this parameter allows the system to check the credit period (grace
period) during which the customer can pay their debt unless the user has the privilege
to skip this process in the Transactions Privileges screen under System
Management.
- Pay Installments Manually: When this parameter is activated, the system displays the
Installment Number in the Receipt Voucher and Journal Entries screens, in which
the user can manually determine the number of the due installment noting that if the
Use Promissory Notes parameter is activated in the General Ledger Parameters, this
parameter cannot be activated.
- Use Sales Invoice as POS: This parameter allows the system to handle the selected
sales invoice as a sales invoice of a certain point of sale. This means that the invoice
data and the quantity will be filled in automatically when the item is selected in the
invoice. Yet, it should be noted that the user will be able to modify the quantity
determined in the sales invoice if the Modify Quantity in Sales Invoice (Use Sales
Invoice as POS) parameter is activated within Customer Management tab on the
Transactions Privileges scree
- Invoice Number of Previous Year is Mandatory: When this parameter is activated,
the user will need to determine the number of the year and the sales invoice when
returning sales of previous years.
- Use Return without Sales Invoice Number: This parameter enables the user to
return sales without determining the number of the sales invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 24 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Link Invoice to a Previous One: When this parameter is activated, the system
displays the Linked Invoice Number field in the Sales Invoice screen, in which the
user can link the current invoice that the organization uses to issue a free-of-charge
quantity to a previous sales invoice. This way, when the customer decides to make a
return from the previous sales invoice a warning message appears in the Return
Request and Sales Return screens indicating that the selected return invoice is linked
to another one.
- Auto Show Customer Name (Cash Sales): This parameter appears when the Use
Sales Invoice as POS parameter is activated and when selected the word Cash Sales
appears by default in the Customer Name field within the sales invoice upon saving.
- Show Payment Screen in Sales Invoice: Activating this parameter allows the system
to display the payment screen where the invoice amount, paid amount, remaining
amount are calculated and related data are automatically printed upon saving.
- Show Item Specifications: Activating this parameter allows the system to display a
separate column called Item specifications in the detailed data section within the
sales invoice. Thus, when the user selects the item in the sales invoice, the system
automatically fetches to this column the related specifications that have been previously
determined in Items data screen.
- Show Item Size in Sales Invoice: Activating this parameter allows the system to
display a separate column called Item Size in the detailed data section within the sales
invoice. Thus, when the user selects the item in the sales invoice, the system
automatically fetches to this column the size of the item that is determined in the Items
Data screen. Afterward, the system multiplies the size of one item by the number of
item units in the sales invoice to render the total item size for each invoice.
- Show Item Weight in Sales Invoices: Activating this parameter allows the system to
display a separate column called Item Weight in the detailed data section within the
sales invoice. Thus, when the user selects the item in the sales invoice, the system
automatically fetches to this column the weight of the item that is determined in the
Items Data screen. Afterward, the system multiplies the weight of one item by the
number of the item units in the sales invoice to render the total items weight for each
invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 25 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Show Total Quantity in Sales Invoice: Activating this parameter allows the system to
display a separate column for the total item quantity in the detailed data section within
the sales invoice, in which the system displays related data as explained above.
- Show Barcode in Transactions Screen: When this parameter is activated, the
system displays a separate column for the item barcode number in the Detailed Data
section of the transactions screen. Thus, when entering items in the sales invoice, the
system will automatically display the barcode in the Barcode Number column provided
that the barcode number is previously defined in the Items Data screen.
- Show Representative Commission by Item in Sales Invoice: When this parameter
is activated, the system displays a separate column for the representative commission
in the Detailed Data section of the sales invoice. In this column, the system displays
the representative commission that is previously defined in the Items Data screen at
each item level.
- Auto Show Unit List upon Data Entry in Sales Transaction Screen: When this
parameter is activated, the system will automatically display the units list once the user
moves from the Item Number field, which helps them select the unit without having to
go to the Units field and pressing the F9 button to select the unit.
- Allow Multiple Promotional Offers for Same Item per Period: When this parameter
is activated, in the sales invoice, the system will display a list of all quotations specified
for the concerned item -in case the item has multiple quotations- from which the user
selects the required one. However, it should be noted that the user can specify a
certain quotation to be applied to the document using the Quotation Number field in
the Customers Loyalty taking into consideration that the quotations appearing are
those related to the concerned promotional group.
- Check Pricing Limits for Promotional Offers in Sales Invoice: Activating this
parameter allows the system to check the maximum and minimum limits specified for
the item prices when the Promotional Offers screen is used. If the price is higher
than the maximum limit or below the minimum limit, the system will reject this
quotation.
- Fetch Items Sales Discount When Promotion is FOC: Activating this parameter
affects the Sales Invoices and Customer Requests screens, Points Of Sale and

Enterprise Resource Planning 26 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Mobile Distribution Application systems, and allows the system to fetch the sales
discount selected in the Discount Coding screen, when the promotional offers
available are free of charge quantities. Otherwise, the system prevents the user from
fetching discounts to the invoice.
- Check Below Cost Sales for Promotional Offers in Sales Invoice: When this
parameter is activated, the system checks the item cost and prevents selling during
promotional offers with prices less than the specified item cost.
- Fetch Prices from Customers Requests to Sales Invoice: With the help of this
parameter the user can determine how the prices will be fetched from the customer
request of the sales invoice using one of the following options; whether Fetch Request
Price, Fetch Default Price, and Do Not Fetch Request Price.
- Maximum Limit for Items Request on Specific Date in Customers Requests: In
this field, the user determines the maximum number of customer requests allowed per
day for a specific item.
- Maximum Days Before Customer Request Expiration: With the help of this field, the
user can determine the maximum number of days after which the customer’s request
becomes invalid and the exact expiry date is specified. Otherwise, the user will need to
specify the maximum number of days after which the request expires in the Customer
Requests screen.
- Maximum Days Before Quotation Expiration: In this field, the user can determine
the maximum number of days after which the quotation expires. Otherwise, the user
will need to manually do so in the Quotations screen.
- Maximum Days of Items Reservation in Customers Requests: In this field, the user
can determine the maximum number of days after which the item quantities
cannot be reserved and reservation end date is determined. Otherwise, the user
will need to do so in the Customer Requests screen.
- Charges Type by Item: This parameter is used when the selected impact type in the
Additional Amounts and Discounts screen is At the Item Level and when activated,
it helps the user control the charge type by selecting one the provided options based
on which the fields appearing on the Additional Amounts and Discounts screen
changes:

Enterprise Resource Planning 27 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Unused: When this option is selected, charges are not applied by item.
 Items: When this option is selected, the user will be able to define the charges for
each individual item or for all items by determining the charge number and its type
(whether percentage or value). Once the item is fetched, the linked charge is
automatically fetched to the sales invoice noting that if the charge is an amount,
this amount is displayed directly and if it is a percentage, the system will calculate
it by multiplying the quantity by the price by the percentage.
 Item and Customer Type: When this option is selected, the user will be able to
define the charge and link it to a certain item and customer type by determining the
charge number and type (whether percentage or value). Thus, when both the item
and customer type are fetched, the linked charge will be automatically fetched to
the sales invoice noting that if the charge is an amount, this amount will be
displayed directly and if it is a percentage, the system will calculate it by multiplying
the Quantity by the Price by the Percentage.
 Item and Customer: When this option is selected, the user will be able to define
the charge and link it to a certain item and customer by determining the charge
number and type (whether percentage or value). Thus, when both the item and
customer are fetched, the linked charge will be automatically fetched to the sales
invoice noting that if the charge is an amount, this amount will be displayed directly
and if it is a percentage, the system will calculate it by multiplying the Quantity by
the Price by the Percentage.
 Group and Customer: When this option is selected, the user will be able to define
the charge and link it to a certain group and customer by determining the charge
number and type (whether percentage or value). Thus, when both the warehouse
group and customer are fetched, the linked charge will be automatically fetched to
the sales invoice noting that if the charge is an amount, this amount will be
displayed directly and if it is a percentage, the system will calculate it by multiplying
the Quantity by the Price by the Percentage.
 Invoice Type: When this option is selected, the user will be able to define the
charge and link it to a certain item and invoice type by determining the charge
number and type (whether percentage or value). Thus, when both the invoice type

Enterprise Resource Planning 28 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

and item are fetched, the linked charge will be automatically fetched to the sales
invoice noting that if the charge is an amount, this amount will be displayed directly
and if it is a percentage, the system will calculate it by multiplying the Quantity by
the Price by the Percentage.
- Charges Type by Item for Warehouses: This parameter appears when the user
selects any of the options included in the Charges Type by Item parameter other than
the Unused option. Here, the user can determine whether the determined charge is
General for all warehouses or By Warehouse; in other words, every charge will be
linked to a specific warehouse.
- Use Charges for Items by Periods: This parameter appears when the selected option
in the Charges Type by Item parameter is Items. It allows the user to use charges on
items based on the specific periods determined using the two columns From Date and
To Date that appear in the screen used for coding items charges.
- Sales Contracts Sequence: With the help of this parameter, the user can determine
the sales contracts sequence using one of the following options:
 Accumulative: When the user selects this option, the system generates one
sequence for all contracts.
 By Type: When the user selects this option, the system generates the sequence of
contracts based on the types defined in the Sales Contracts Types screen, and in
case there are multiple contract types, the system will generate a separate
sequence for each.
- Check Credit Period: With the help of this parameter, the user can determine how the
credit period in the sales transactions will be checked using one of the provided
options; whether By Credit Period in Customers Data or By Due Date in
Transactions.
- Credit Limit: With the help of this parameter, the user determines how the credit limit
(maximum amount of credit a customer can receive) applies using one of the following
options:
 By Customer: This option allows the user to audit the credit each individual
customer receives when issuing sales invoices. If the credit exceeds the selected
limit, the system handles it as previously determined; whether Not Allow, Allow,
Allow with Alert.

Enterprise Resource Planning 29 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 By Customer and Center: This option allows the user to audit the credit each
individual customer receives based on the related cost center when issuing sales
invoices. If the credit exceeds the selected limit for a certain customer and their
related cost center, the system handles it as previously determined; whether Not
Allow, Allow, Allow with Alert.
- VAT Calculation Method: With the help of this parameter, the user can determine
how the VAT on the sales invoice will be calculated; whether on the item’s total price
or the item’s total price minus the allowed discount.
- Calculate Tax on FOC Qtys in Sales: When this parameter is activated, the system
calculates the tax on both free and paid quantities included in the sales invoices.
- Use Sales Return Request: With the help of this parameter, the user can determine
whether or not the sales return request will be used by selecting one of the following
options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, the system prevents using the sales return
request.
 Optional: When this option is selected, the user will be able to create a sales
return request and then fetch it to the sales return invoice or directly apply the
sales return without using the sales return request.
 Mandatory: When this option is selected, the user will not be able to issue a sales
return invoice unless there is a related sales return request.
- Allow Partial Return for Health Insurance Invoice: When this parameter is activated,
the system allows the user to return part of the health insurance member's invoice.
Otherwise, the entire invoice will be returned.
- Issuance in Onyx Lite System: When the Use Sales Invoices with a Goods Out
Note is activated, this parameter can be used to determine the issuance method in
Onyx Lite System by selecting one of the following options:
 Auto Issuance To Department: When this option is selected, no issuance note
will be used in branch and the system will implement automatic issuance in the
department when posting the branches-related invoices.
 Use Issuance in Department: When this option is selected, no issuance note will
be used in branch and the user will need to manually generate an issuance note in
the department when posting the branches-related invoices.

Enterprise Resource Planning 30 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Use Issuance in Branch: When this option is selected, the user will need to use
an issuance note in the branch.
- Use Medical Insurance System: This parameter is used with medical organizations
and when activated, the system shows multiple coding screens that are related to
medical insurance data in the customers' management system inputs. This includes
Medical Networks Data, Insurance Beneficiaries, Insurance Companies Data,
Member Insurance Data, Insurers Claims, in addition to the necessary fields that are
used to handle the insurance members in sales and return invoices. Medical insurance
system is commonly used in pharmacies, medical centers, and hospitals that are
actually working with a medical insurance system.
- Use Contracting Terms for Insurers: This parameter appears when the Use Medical
Insurance System parameter is activated, and when activated, the system displays
the Contracting Conditions tab in the Insurers Data screen. In this tab, the user can
enter the contracting terms for the insurers and determine whether they will be
mandatory or optional in the sales invoice.
- Suspend: When this parameter is activated, the system displays the Suspend flag in
system transactions, which when activated the selected document is suspended, the
financial effect of the customers' accounts is not rendered and the posting is not
implemented. However, if the user doesn’t have the privilege to Modify and Delete on
the system, they will not be able to use this parameter.
- Post Representatives Commission upon issuing Sales Invoice: This parameter
allows the user to post the representative commissions, once the sales invoice is
issued for the customer, to the representatives’ commission account defined in the
Intermediary Accounts screen.
- Check Pricing Limits Using Price After Discount in Sales Invoice: If this parameter
is activated, the system will not allow sale completion if the selling price minus the
discount is less than the minimum limit.
- Apply Items Sales Discount Plus Promotions: When this parameter is activated, the
system applies items sales discount(s) along with the promotional discounts.
Otherwise, only promotional discounts will apply.
- Allow Selling from Warehouses Linked to Other Branches: This parameter appears
when the Use Auto Intermediary Account for Branches Current Account parameter

Enterprise Resource Planning 31 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

is activated under general configuration and the selected option in the Post Inventory
parameter within the Inventory Parameters screen is Inspection Voucher. It allows
the user to sell from the warehouses belonging to other branches if they have the
necessary privileges.
- Customer's Credit Limit Is Mandatory: When this parameter is activated, the system
prevents any sale transactions made to customers unless the customer’s credit limit is
determined in the Limits Setup screen.
Third: Advanced Options (2)

- Customer Number is Mandatory for Cash Payment: When this parameter is

activated, the user will have to enter a customer number in the Sales Invoice screen
when selling in cash. Otherwise, entering a customer number will be optional.
- Representative Number/ Region/ Collector/ Driver in Invoice is Mandatory: When
any of these parameters is activated, the user will have to enter their related data in
the sales transaction’s screens before saving the transaction. Otherwise, the system
will not allow saving.
- Return Reason in Returns Is Mandatory: When this parameter is activated, the user
will not be able to save the sales return invoice unless they enter the return reason in
the related field.
- Due Date Is Mandatory: When this parameter is activated, the user will have to
determine the due date in the credit sales invoice before saving. Otherwise, the system
will not allow saving.

Enterprise Resource Planning 32 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Customer Phone Number Is Mandatory In Cash Invoices: When this parameter, the
user will need to enter the customer’s phone number in the cash sales invoice before
saving. Otherwise, the system will not allow saving.
- Customer Name in Invoice is Mandatory: When this parameter is activated, the user
will need to enter the customer’s name in the cash invoice before saving the invoice.
Otherwise, the system will automatically save the invoice with cash Sales as the name
of the customer.
- Cash Customer Number in Cash Invoices is Mandatory: If this parameter is
activated, the user will need to enter the cash customer number in the cash invoice
before saving the cash sales invoice. Otherwise, the system will not allow saving.
- Check Customer Link to Collector in Transactions: When this parameter is
activated, the system checks whether the customer is linked to a certain collector in the
Customers Data screen, and also whether the user has determined a certain collector
in the transactions’ screens and doesn’t allow the user to save the invoice of sales on
credit unless the collector is selected and linked to the customer.
- Link Customer to Multiple Collectors: Activating this parameter allows the user to
link the customer to multiple collectors in the Link Customers to Collectors tab on
the Customers Data screen. This way, the user can select, in the sales invoice, the
targeted customer-related collector that may differ from one invoice to another.
- Link Customer to Multiple Representatives: Activating this parameter allows the
user to link the customer to multiple representatives in the Customers Data screen,
who will then be handled in sales and returns invoices.
- Link Representatives to Items Activities: If this parameter is activated, the user will
not be able to link the representative to the sales invoice unless this representative is
linked to the items activities in the Sales Representatives Data screen noting that
these activities are predefined in the Items Activities screen under the Inventory
Management system and are linked to the item in the Items Data screen.
- Link Representative to Warehouse, Cash and Center: When this parameter is
activated, the user will need to link the representative to the warehouse, cash, and cost
center when defining his data. This way, upon issuing a sales invoice and selecting the
cash, warehouse, and center, the related representative is fetched automatically to the

Enterprise Resource Planning 33 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Representative field or vice versa, i.e., if the representative is selected, the

warehouse and cash are fetched automatically.
- Auto Reserve Items Quantities upon Filling Sales Invoice: Activating this parameter
allows the user to reserve the quantities entered in customers’ requests and sales
invoices before saving.
- Use Payment and Receipt for Invoices and Returns: When this parameter is
activated, the system displays two screens; one for payment and the other for delivery,
where the user can check that money is brought into cash and goods are delivered the
customer.
- Display Available Items in WH Only in Invoice Items List: When this parameter is
activated, the system displays in the sales invoice only the items that exist in quantities
in the warehouse.
- Fetch Previous Invoice Price upon Adding New Invoice from Old One: Activating
this parameter allows the user to fetch from the system the price of the old invoice that
is used to prepare a new one by clicking the “Add From” button.
- Use Compensation Quantities: Activating this parameter, allows the system to show
the Compensation Quantities Coding screen where the user can define and code the
compensation policies of the organization so that they can link each customer to the
related policy in the Customers Data screen, in addition to the Request
Compensation Quantity and Grant Compensation Quantities screens that appear
under customers management system transactions.
- Use Onyx Lite System without Inventory: This parameter appears when the Onyx
Lite System is used and once activated; users in branches could use the Onyx Lite
System without the inventory and without checking the quantity available in
warehouses. Then, when it is time to sync data, all required quantities must be
provided first so the stock quantities can be affected.
- Auto Convert Sales Invoice to Consignment Received Note: Activating this
parameter allows the system to automatically transfer the sales invoice to the
Consignments Received Note screen where the quantities that are sold but yet to be
delivered are monitored as they are posted only financially without affecting the
warehouse inventory. This receive and issue process is made for auditing purposes of

Enterprise Resource Planning 34 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

the received quantities only because once the invoice is issued, it affects customer and
warehouse accounts directly.
- Post Representatives Commission as per a Receipt Voucher: Activating this
parameter allows the system to post the representative commission to the
representatives' commission account that is included among the intermediary accounts
once the receipt voucher of the amount collected from the customer is issued. Then,
the representative commission percentage is defined in the Sales Representatives
Data screen.
- Post Collectors Commission as per a Receipt Voucher: Activating this parameter
allows the system to post the collector commission to the collectors’ commission
account that is included among the intermediary accounts once the receipt voucher of
the amount collected from the customer is issued. Then, the collector commission
percentage is defined in the Collectors Data screen.
- Add Unavailable Quantities to Required Items upon Entry in Transactions: When
this parameter is activated, any discrepancy that results when the quantity entered in
the system transactions is greater than the available quantity will be automatically
added to the Required Items screen.
Hint: All customer-required items can be displayed in both the Sales
Invoices and Customers Orders screens by pressing Shift+F2 in the
Item number field. This way the user could follow-up on the required
items availability and notify the customer of available items in the next
selling process.
- Auto Grant Privileges over Customer Accounts to Users Who Have Privileges
over Customer Group Account: When this parameter is activated, users who have
the privilege to use the group account to which the new customers belong are
automatically granted the privilege over the newly added customers in the Customers
Data.
- Use Advanced Payment in Sales Contracts: Activating this parameter shows the
Advanced Payment field in the Sales Contracts screen. In this field, the user can
enter the advanced payment that is collected using a receipt voucher.

Enterprise Resource Planning 35 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Calculate Tax On Advance Payment: This parameter appears when the Use
Advanced Payment in Sales Contracts parameter is activated, and when activated,
the system calculates the tax on the paid advanced payment that is collected with a
receipt voucher. Afterward, the tax percentage is rendered in the sales invoice.
- Employee Type: With the help of this parameter, the user can include in the sales
invoices an employee who is not a sales employee and for which a sales commission
needs to be calculated. This is done using one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, the user will not be able to include any
employee within the sales screens.
 Single: When this option is selected, a single field appears where the user could
enter the number of the employee within sales transactions only.
 Multiple: When this option is selected, a column appears in the Detailed Data
section of the sales transactions where the user could optionally enter the number
of each employee next to the related item number.
- Show Additional Fields at Details Level: With the help of this parameter, the user
could control whether or not the Additional Data fields are displayed for each item
separately in the Sales Transactions screens using one of the following options:
Unused, One Field, Two, Three Fields, and so on.
- Duplicate Item in Sales: With the help of this parameter, the user could control
whether or not the items are duplicated in the sales transactions of the same
warehouse using one of the following options: Unused, Yes with Alert, and Yes
without Alert.
- Length of Cash Customer Mobile Number: In this field, the user determines the
maximum length of the cash customer mobile number within the Other Data tab in the
Cash Customers Data screen. For example, if the user determines that the maximum
length of the customer's mobile number is 9, the system will only allow a 9-digit mobile
number.
- Mobile Number Prefix: In this field, the user determines the prefix of the cash
customer's mobile number, which can be checked in the Cash Customers Data
screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 36 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Return Period In Days: In this field, the user determines the number of days during
which the system allows the customer to return the sales and after which no sale
returns are allowed starting from the sales invoice date.
- Use Donations in Sales Invoice: When this parameter is activated, the Donations
Accounts Coding screen appears under the Sales Management System
Configuration. In this screen, the user could establish codes for charities and link
them to the donation accounts. Then, whenever a donated amount is specified in the
invoice, it will be posted to the donation accounts determined therein.
- Show Representatives Commission in Sales Invoice: Activating this parameter
allows the system to display a field in the sales invoice where the representative
commission could be determined. Then, once the invoice is issued and the
representative is specified, the system displays the representative commission directly
in the related field.
- Link Scale to Trucks Entry/ Exit: Activating this parameter allows the system to (1)
show the Trucks Entry/ Exit Movement screen where the user could handle truck
scales under the Sales Management System Transactions, and (2) show the Link
To Scale In Customer Requests button in Customers Requests screen, which helps
the user link the customer request to the scale so that the system acknowledges the
scale measurement automatically.
- Allowed Discrepancy Percentage between Actual Weight and Request Quantity:
This field appears when the Link Scale to Trucks Entry/ Exit parameter is activated.
When the user determines the discrepancy percentage here, the system checks the
truck’s curb weight and its weight when loaded and then compares them to the weight
requested quantity. If the resultant weight discrepancy lies within the allowed limit, the
weight is saved. Otherwise, the system displays a message indicating that the weight
exceeds the allowed percentage.
- Allow Modifying Unit Price in Sales: Activating this parameter allows the user to edit
the selling price for each sold unit with specified measurements in the Sales Invoice
screen provided that the user has the privilege to edit the price.
- Duplicate Reference Number in Transactions: With the help of this parameter, the
user could determine whether or not the reference number will be duplicated using one
of the following options:

Enterprise Resource Planning 37 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Not Allow: When this option is selected, the system does not allow reference
number duplication in transactions.
 Allow: When this option is selected, the system allows reference number
duplication in transactions.
 Allow with Alert: When this option is selected, the system allows reference
number duplication in transactions and alerts the user when the reference number
is duplicated.
- Coding QR Code: Activating this parameter allows electronic invoices to code the QR
Code so that its data appears coded to the reader.
- Instant Issuance of Sales Invoices: This parameter appears when the Use Sales
Invoices with Goods out Note parameter is activated. It (1) allows the user to issue
the sales invoice items without having to use a sales invoice issuance note, and (2)
allows the system to display the Goods out Type field in the Default Data tab under
the Sales Invoices screen where the user could select the Immediate Issuance
option. This way, when the invoice data is completed all the invoice items are issued
and data of the sales invoice appears automatically in the Sales Invoice Issuance
Note screen. However, it should be noted that the Goods out Type field does not
appear if the organization uses the serial numbers and accessories in the inventory
system.
- Display Item Net Price in Sales Invoice: Activating this parameter allows the system
to display the Net Price column in the detailed data where the net price, which equals
the price minus the discount plus charges plus tax, appears at the item level.
- Use Packing Data in Sales: Activating this parameter allows the system to display a
sub-screen where the user could enter the packing data based on which the quantity
of the item will be fetched. This screen appears right after the user determines the item
and moves to the Quantity column in the Sales Invoice screen.
- Use Concrete Requests: Activating this parameter allows the system to display the
Concrete Specifications tab within the Customers Requests screen under Sales
Management System. In this tab, the user could handle concrete codes and link
specifications to items.

Enterprise Resource Planning 38 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Link Invoice Issuance Note to Warehouse Receipt: This parameter appears when
the Use Sales Invoices with Goods out Note parameter is activated. It helps the
user prepare sales invoices and whenever they find that there is no sufficient balance
available upon issuing an invoice issuance note, they could set up a warehouse
transfer from the warehouse where the item exists to the selling warehouse based on
the sales invoice. Then, based on the transferred items, all items' quantities are
fetched from the warehouse receipt voucher to the sales invoice issuance note
automatically.
- Show Pricing Level in Sales Transactions Screens: Activating this parameter allows
the system to display the Pricing Level column within the Detailed Data section. In
this column, the user could determine the required pricing level at the item level.
- Follow-up Sales Invoices: When this parameter is activated, the system displays a
screen where the user could follow-up on the sales invoice, provided that all follow-up
phases are coded within the General Codings screen under the Customers
Management System and the user has the privilege to check these phases and
follow-up on invoices from the Sales Invoices Follow-up screen.
- Use Customers Claim: Activating this parameter allows the system to display the
Follow-up Customers Claims screen noting that customers’ claims stages should be
coded within the General Codings screen under Customers Management System
and the user is given the privilege to review these stages and then carry out customers
claims from the Follow-up Customers Claims screen.
- Show Item Size in Transactions Screen: Activating this parameter allows the system
to display the Size column the transactions’ screens, where the item measurements
could be displayed.
- Show Item Detailed Description: When this parameter is activated, the following
happens:
 The system displays the Items Description Details screen within the list of
screens that appears when clicking the Linked Screens button on the Items Data
screen. In this screen, the user could enter the detailed description, with an image
if any, at the item level.

Enterprise Resource Planning 39 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 The Show Item Detailed Description button appears within both the Customers
Requests and Sales Invoices screens.
This description helps determine the specifications of the item that will be sold to
the customer if there exist previously coded specifications in the Items Data
screen. This includes items like glasses, sewing equipment, and so on.
- Use Scientific Representative System: This parameter is dedicated to the
pharmaceutical sector. Upon activating this parameter, the system allows handling the
scientific representatives of pharmaceutical companies. Consequently, the Linked to
Scientific Representative flag appears in the Representatives Data screen. If this
flag is ticked for a particular representative, tabs for the scientific representative will
appear in the Representative Data screen. The same option will appear in the Driver
Data screen. In the sales invoice, the Scientific Representative Number and
Representative Person Name fields appear. These fields are automatically filled after
selecting the item based on the link between the item and the region linked to the
representative. This field (Scientific Representative) has been given a special name
to prevent confusing it with the number of the sales representative. It should be noted
that the scientific representative has no impact on the financial entries and the financial
impact remains the same in the system at the level of the sales representative.
- Show Competitor Price at Bottom of Sales Invoice: When this parameter is
activated, the system displays the competitor prices at the bottom of the invoice for the
items determined in the Competitors Pricelists screen.
- Use Serial Numbers in Guarantee Card: With the help of this parameter, the user
could determine whether or not the serial numbers will appear in the guarantee cards
using one of the following options:
 Unused: When the user selects this option, the system does not use the serial
numbers in the Items Guarantee Card screen.
 Mandatory: When the user selects this option, the system will allow only items with
serial numbers. Thus, entering a serial number in the Serial Number column will
be mandatory.
- Auto Display Expiry Dates List in Sales Screen: When this parameter is activated,
the system displays a list of the quantities available according to the expiry dates within

Enterprise Resource Planning 40 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

the sales transactions screens. With the help of this list, the user could select the
appropriate expiry date without using the F9 button.
Fourth: Advanced Options (3)

- Pricing Method for Customers: With the help of this parameter, the user determines
the type of pricing for customers in the Customer Data screen using one of the
following options:
 At Customer Level: When this option is selected, the system displays the Price
Type field within the Customers Data screen, where the user could determine the
price type at the customer level.
 Price Without Tax/ Price Includes Tax: When either of these options is selected,
the price type for each customer is approved, and the Price Type field disappears
from the Customer Data screen.
- Auto Show List of Quantities Available in Warehouses in Case of Multi
Warehouses: When this parameter is activated, a list of the quantities available of an
item in each warehouse appears in the sales invoice once the user selects that item.
- Show Alert of Item Already Sold to Customer: When this parameter is activated, the
system displays an alert for items already sold to the customer appears. This alert is a
color that appears in the Item Name field when the user starts entering items into the
Sales Invoices and Customers Requests screens.
- Returning to Same Representative is Mandatory: When this parameter is activated,
the system prevents the user from changing the number of the representative in the

Enterprise Resource Planning 41 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

sales return invoice and the number of the representative who made the sale will be
automatically kept as is in the sales return.
- Use ATM connection to Bank's Teller: This parameter is activated if the ATM is
linked to the bank and when the selected payment method in the invoice is Network.
This way, the user could enter the amount into the ATM connected to the bank, and
the transaction is sent from the ATM to the bank where the customer's balance is
affected. Then, once the bank approves the transaction, the system automatically
renders the amount, transaction number, and credit card data in the sales invoice.
- Waiting Time in Seconds: In this field, the user enters the waiting time for the
response to the transaction sent to the bank.
- Ignore Description Upon Fetching Customer Request to Invoice: Activating this
parameter allows the system to ignore the explanatory description added within the
Customers Requests screen via the distribution application when the request is
fetched to the sales invoice. Otherwise, the system will fetch the description within the
request as is to the invoice and allows modifying it.
- Expiry Date Is Mandatory/ Batch Number in Invoice Is Mandatory: These
parameters appear when the Use Sales Invoices with Goods out Note, Use Expiry
Date, and Use Batch Number parameters are activated. This way, the sales invoice
will not be saved unless the expiry date \batch number are determined.
- Number of Installments in Credit Invoice Is Mandatory: When this parameter is
activated, the credit sales invoice will not be saved unless the number of installments
and the amount of each installment are determined.
- Modifying Customer Request upon Fetching to Purchase Request Not Allowed:
When this parameter is activated, the system does not allow the user to modify the
data of the customer's request after fetching it to the purchase request.
Fifth: Customers Loyalty

Enterprise Resource Planning 42 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Use Discount Cards: When this parameter is activated, the system displays a screen
where the user could create the necessary codes for the discount cards that will be
used in the Multi-Payment to apply a certain discount to the invoice. These discount
cards are distributed to the customers based on the discount policy set by the
organization. Once an invoice is issued to the customer, the user can enter the number
of the discount card in the related field. This way, the discount value is determined
based on the discount card code and the customer only pays the net value of the
invoice.
- Use Loyalty System: When this parameter is activated, the loyalty system is
activated. A system that calculates the points a customer earns on their purchases,
and which can be redeemed for a certain amount as determined by the organization.
- Point Calculation Method: This field helps the user determine how to calculate the
points that will be redeemed using one of the following options:
 By Invoice: When the user selects this option, the system calculates the earned
points at the invoice level. In other words, based on the value of the invoice, the
user will earn a certain number of points. However, if the resultant value includes
fractions that were not calculated because of the type and standards of the loyalty
program, these fractions will not be rounded or posted to the next invoice. For
example, assume that to earn 10 (or multiples of 10) points, the customer needs to
purchase items for 10,000 (or multiples of 10,000) dollars. In this case, when the
customer purchases items for 15,000 dollars, they will only earn 10 points for the
(10,000), and the remaining 5,000 will be ignored since they are not a multiple of
10,000, and they will not be calculated with the next invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 43 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 By Segments (Cumulative Balances): When this option is selected, the system

calculates the points on all customer invoices upon redemption request. This way,
the system redeems the value of all earned points without rounding them up.
- Period for Points Approval in Days: In this field, the user determines the period
during which the loyalty points should be approved. It could be 1 day for example.
- Points Expiry Time: In this field, the user determines how long the loyalty points stays
valid using one of the following options:
 Each Year End: When the user selects this option, the points validity ends by the
end of each year.
 By Transaction Date: When the user selects this option, the points validity starts
on the date of the first invoice and ends on the end date of the selected loyalty
program, which is determined in the Duration in Months field.
 By Activation Date: When the user selects this option, the points validity ends on
the same day as that when the customer loyalty program activation ends, and
which is determined in the Duration in Months field.
- Duration in Months: In this field, the user determines user determines how long
should the loyalty program last in months if the At Year End option is not selected
used.
- Loyalty Program-Member Remark: In this field, the user enters the remark that the
organization wants to deliver to the member, highlighting the benefits of subscribing to
the loyalty program noting that this remark appears within the sales invoices.
- Non-Loyalty Program Member Remark: In this field, the user enters the remark that
the organization wants to deliver to the unsubscribed members, motivating them to
subscribe to the program noting that this remark appears within the sales invoices.
- Send Via: This parameter helps the user determine how the messages that the
organization wants to deliver to customers will be sent using one of the following
options:
 Unused: When the user selects this option, no messages will be sent to the
customer.
 SMS: When the user selects this option, all the messages will be sent to customers
via short message service (SMS) on their mobile phones.

Enterprise Resource Planning 44 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 E-Mail: When the user selects this option, all the messages will be sent to
customers via E-mail.
 SMS + E-Mail: When the user selects this option, all the messages will be sent to
customers via both the e-mail and short messages service.
- Send Message by: This parameter helps the user determine the customers to whom
the messages will be sent using one of the following options:
 Optional: When this option is selected, the user could determine the customer that
will be contacted.
 All Customers: When this option is selected, all customers will be contacted.
 Customer Groups: When this option is selected, customers will be emailed at the
group level and the group to which the messages will be sent could be selected in
the Customers Groups data.
- New Account Customer-Message Text: In this field, the user writes the message
that the organization wants to send to customers via one of the above selected
methods when their subscription accounts to the program are created.
- Loyalty Program Member Message Text: In this field, the user writes the message
that the organization wants to send via one of the above selected methods to the
customers who have subscribed to the loyalty program.
- Send Verification Message When Adding New Cash-Customer: Activating this
parameter allows the system -when a new cash customer is added to the Cash
Customers Data or Customer Loyalty tab within the Sales Invoices screen- to send
a verification code that the customer could enter in the Customer Verification Code
field to confirm their identity.
- Send Verification Message Upon Redeeming Points: When this parameter is
activated, the system displays the Send Verification Code button upon redeeming
points in the Customers Loyalty tab within the Sales Invoices screen. This button
sends a random number, generated upon request, to the customer to enter into the
Customer Verification Code field to verify their identity.
Sixth: Customer Self-Service
This tab appears when the customers self-service system is activated and it is to configure
the customer self-service system.

Enterprise Resource Planning 45 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Default Sale Currency: In this field, the user selects the default currency that the self-
service customers will use from a list of currencies defined in the Currencies Setup
screen.
- Max Days Before Customer Request Expiration: In this field, the user enters the
maximum number of days before the customer's request becomes invalid.
- Items Reservation Period in Customers Requests (in Days): In this field, the user
determines in days the period during which the items can be reserved in customer
requests.
- New Items Period in Days: In this field, the user enters (in days) the period during
which the new items are recorded. For example, if the user enters 30, the system will
display the new items that are recorded during the past 30 days.
- Un Stocked Items Period in Days: In this field, the user enters the number of days
during which the items are provided, which their opening balance was zero before this
period.
- Maximum Number of Unprocessed Customer's Requests: In this field, the user
enters the maximum number of unprocessed customer requests in Self Service
Application.
- Link Customers to Items' Activities: If this parameter is activated, the system
displays in the Customers Data screen a tab where the user can link the customer to
item activities, and thus the sales will be allowed only for the activities linked to this
customer.

Enterprise Resource Planning 46 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Approve Requests: If this parameter is activated, the system approves the requests
automatically upon saving.
- Branch Number: In this field, the user determines the branch that will be dealt with in
the self-service system.
- Cost Center/ Project/ Activity Number: In these fields, the user determines the
center, project, and activity linked to self-service transactions if any.
- Warehouse Number: In this field, the user determines the warehouse that will be dealt
with in the self-service system.
- Storing Method of Customers Requests Quantities: In this field, the user
determines how the customer request quantities will be stored using one of the
following options:
 Save Available Quantities Only.
 Save Available Quantities and Unavailable Quantities of Required Items. When
this option is selected, the system saves the quantities included in the request
whether available or unavailable as items required for the customer and the
customer-related items, which are previously requested, can also be displayed
when submitting a new customer request.
 Save All Quantity.
- Request Type: In this field, the user determines the type of the customer request that
will be used in the self-service system.
- Description: In this field, the user enters the default description that will appear
automatically for the customer request.

Enterprise Resource Planning 47 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Types
Use: With the help in this screen, the user can classify customers into wholesale customers,
retail customers, or customers by branches and then link these customers to the related
category in the Customer Data screen, which helps generate analytical reports based on
the selected classification. The user can also determine a certain sequence for sales and
returns invoices based on the configuration defined in the customer system parameters
screen; whether By Type, By Type and Warehouse, or By Type, Warehouse and
Payment Method.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the customer type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user manually enters the name of the customer type in
the default system language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user manually enters the name of the customer type in
the foreign language defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: Users can display the customers linked to a certain type by
clicking the corresponding “Arrow” button next to the Type Number.

Enterprise Resource Planning 48 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Degrees
Use: With the help of this screen, the user can define the levels of customers; whether
Excellent, Very Good, Good or Acceptable and then set a degree for each level according
to evaluation criteria adopted by the organization noting that these degrees are used in
Degree Number field of the Customer Data screen, which helps generate reports on
customers based on the selected degree.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Degree Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the customer's degree.
- Degree Name: In this field, the user manually enters the name of the degree which
represents the customer level in the default system language; Excellent, Very Good,
Good, Acceptable, etc.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user manually enters the name of the degree (level) in
the foreign system language.
- Degree Value: In this field, the user enters the degree that represents the customer
level. If the customer achieves this degree, their data will be automatically transferred
from the previously selected degree to the newly achieved one based on the evaluation
criteria.

Enterprise Resource Planning 49 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Evaluation Criteria: By clicking the Evaluation Criteria button, the system displays
the criteria that have been pre-activated in the Customers Evaluation Criteria screen
and whose values are defined as percentages or amounts. If the customer meets
these criteria and reaches the amounts\percentages specified for this degree, they will
be moved from the current degree to the new one automatically.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: Users can display the customers linked to the degree by clicking
on the Arrow button next to the Degree Number field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 50 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Grades Evaluation Criteria

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can determine the customers' evaluation criteria
based on which the customers are evaluated and automatically assigned to a certain degree
once the criteria defined in the Customers Degrees screen at the degree level are
achieved.

How to Use the Screen

This screen includes fixed criteria for customers evaluation which the user cannot modify
only can activate or deactivate them by ticking the corresponding “Active” flag. If the flag
corresponding to any criterion is not ticked, the system will hide this particular criterion
during the evaluation of the customer noting that if the user activates the Sales – Value and
Sales – Quantity, they will not be able to activate the Net Sales – Quantity and Net Sales
– Value.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 51 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Classifications
Use: This screen helps different organizations classify their customers into specific
categories. For Example, they can classify customers based on the industry sector to which
they belong, the size of their commercial or industrial activity, the geographical location
where they carry out their activities...etc. This classification will provide the organization with
additional analytical data on customers which will help them set their sales and marketing
policies and generate analytical reports on customers noting that the classifications
determined here will be linked to customers in the Customers Data screen.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Classification Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable
serial number for the customer's classification.
- Classification Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the classification in the
default language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the classification in the
foreign language defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: Users can display the customers linked to the classification by
clicking the Arrow button corresponding to the Classification Number
field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 52 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Representatives Types
Use: With the help of this screen, the user can classify the representatives according to the
related customer types into wholesale representatives, retail representatives, representatives
by branch, or for example based on customer classifications into industrial sales
representatives, food sales representatives...etc., which particularly helps generate
analytical reports based on the defined categories.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Representative Type: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable
serial number for the representative type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user needs to manually enter the representative type
name in the default language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user manually enters the representative type name in
the foreign language that is defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: Customers linked to a certain representative type can be displayed
by clicking the Arrow button next to the Representative Type field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 53 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Collectors Types
Use: With the help of this screen, the user can classify collectors into similar types that can
be used in the Collectors Data screen as part of the data that are linked to the collector.
This helps generate detailed reports based on the collector type.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Collector Type: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable number for
the collector type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user manually enters the collector type name in the
default language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user manually enters the collector type name in the
foreign language defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: Customers linked to the selected collector type can be displayed
by clicking the Arrow button next to the Collector Type field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 54 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Marketeer Types
Use: With the help of this screen, the user can classify marketeers into similar types, which
can be used in the Marketeers Data screen as part of the data that are linked to the
marketeer. This helps generate detailed reports based on marketeer type.

How To Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Marketeer Type: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the marketeer type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user manually enters the type name in the default
language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user manually enters the type name in the foreign
language defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: Customers linked to the selected marketeer type can be displayed
by clicking the Arrow next to the Promoter Type field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 55 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Marketeer Levels Codes

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can code different levels of marketeers, which
can later be linked each to related marketeer in the Marketeers Data screen for easy
classification.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Degree Type: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the degree number.
- Degree Name: In this field, the user manually enters the marketeer’s degree name in
the default language of the system; whether Excellent, Very Good, Good, and
Acceptable, etc.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user manually enters the marketeer’s degree name in
the foreign language defined on the system.
- Percentage: Here, the user enters the value of degrees previously coded based on the
type of the marketeers that will be added and linked -each to the related individual- in
the Marketeers Data screen.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: Marketeers linked to the selected degree can be displayed by
clicking the Arrow button next to the Degree Number field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 56 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Payment Cards Group

Use: In this screen, the user can classify the payment cards into groups. This way, when
entering payment card types, the user will be able to link them, each to the related group,
which helps generate payment card reports per group.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Group Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the credit cards group.
- Default: Using this flag, the system allows the user to assign only one default group
that will appear automatically in the Payment Card Types screen.
- Group Name/ Foreign Name: In these fields, the user manually enters the credit card
group name in both the default and foreign languages defined on the system
respectively.
- Group Type: In this field, the user selects the type of group by selecting one of the
following options:
 Bank Cards: This option is used for the group of cards that will be used in the
banking transactions on the system.
 Wallet Cards: This option is used for the group of cards that will be used in the
electronic wallet system, and when selected, the system displays other mandatory
fields, which are Path (wallet cards path), User Name, and Password.

Enterprise Resource Planning 57 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Path/ User Name/ Password: These fields appear when the selected option in the
Group Type field is Wallet Cards. Here, the user determines the path, username, and
password that will be used to link Electronic Wallet System to the web service.

Enterprise Resource Planning 58 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Payment Cards Types

Use: In this screen, the user can classify the types of payment cards that banks issue, for
example into Bank cards, Visa cards, or Master cards, etc., and which will be linked to the
machines that the system will handle at points of sale.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Group Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the default group,
which has been selected in the Payment Cards Group screen; however, the user will
be able to change it as needed.
- Card Type: Here, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial number for the
type of cards.
- Card Name: In this field, the user needs to manually enter the card name in the
system's default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user manually enters the card name in the foreign
language defined on the system.
- Service Center Address/ Phone/ Email: In these fields, the user enters the address,
phone number and zip code of the credit card service center respectively.
- Tax Rate: Here, the user enters the tax percentage on payment card commission,
which will apply to sales and return invoices when the selected payment method is
Network and the payment card commission is previously defined in the Banks Data
screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 59 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Fetch New Machines: When the user clicks this button, the system automatically
displays the numbers of machines, the account number, as well as the bank number
from the Payment Cards Data screen.
- POS Number: This column appears next to the Bank Number column in the Detailed
Data section when the POS system is used. It includes the POS numbers that the
user determines from the list that appears when pressing the (F9) button.
- Charge Customer for Fees: When this parameter is activated, the system deducts the
bank commission from the balance of the customer who holds the card. Otherwise, the
system will deduct the bank commission value from the balance of the organization
and, in this case, the commission entry will be as follows:
Date Description Debit Credit
From/ Commission Account Xx
To/ Bank Account Xx
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 60 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Payment Cards Data

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can define the bank-affiliated machines (service
points) that the organization deals with, the payment cards that customers will use to pay
their debts, the bank account number, commission account number, and the intermediary
account number that the system will include in the sales invoice of the type (payment
cards). When the customer makes a payment using the selected card, the bank directly,
affect both the customer account and the organization account noting that this can be done
for a commission that is debited to the organization account and mediated through
transactions if the due time is defined in days in the Banks screen.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Machine Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable number
for the machine that will be used in the points of sale and linked to the payment card.
- Bank Number/ Bank Account Number/ Bank Name: Once the user selects the
required bank number from the list that appears when pressing F9 in the Bank
Number field, the system automatically fetches the account number and name of the
selected bank, which are pre-defined in the Chart of Accounts screen, to the Bank
Account Number and Bank Name fields respectively.
- Commission Account Number: In this field, the user determines from the list that
appears when pressing the F9 button the number of the account where the bank fees
will be recorded, taking into consideration that the percentage of these fees is pre-

Enterprise Resource Planning 61 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

determined in the Banks screen under the General Ledger system and in which case
the entry will be as follows:
Date Description Debit Credit Detail
From/ Xx
Bank Account x
Commission Account x
To/ Xx
Bank Account (Commission) x
Sales Revenues Account x
- Warehouse/ Branch Number: In these fields, the user determines the warehouse and
branch that are linked to the bank device\machine that is used when carrying out a
sales transaction from this particular branch and warehouse.
- POS Number: In this field, the user determines the point of sale that is linked to the
bank machine that will be used, taking into consideration that they can check this
machine in the Points of Sale and Restaurant Management Systems.
- Machine Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the bank-affiliated machine
with which the payment card is used, and the amount withdrew is recorded as debit on
the customer's bank account and as credit on the organization account.
- Inactive: Upon ticking this flag, the system stops any transactions carried out on the
selected machine at the points of sale.
- User Number: Upon ticking the “Inactive” flag, the system displays the number of user
who made the deactivation.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the date and time of
deactivation.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user enters the reason for the deactivation.
- Notes Receivable: Notes receivable are the intermediary account in which the sales
amount is mediated during the due period that is determined in days in the Payment
Cards tab within the Banks screen, and after which the amount is reversed from the
bank account to the intermediary account once selected.
- Account Name: In this field, the system automatically displays the name of the notes
receivable account once the notes receivable intermediary account number is
determined.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 62 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Types of Notes Requests

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can classify the additional discount requests that
will be included in sales invoices. This helps the organization generate reports according to
the selected types of discount requests and create the serial numbers of additional discount
requests documents, which will appear in the invoices; whether Cumulative or By Type,
based on the selected option in the Customers Management System Parameters screen.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Type Number: In this column, the system automatically displays a modifiable number
for the request type.
- Type Name: In this column, the user enters the name of the additional discount
request type that will appear in invoices in the default language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this column, the user enters the name of the additional discount
request type that will appear in invoices in the foreign language defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user needs to press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 63 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Notes Types
Use: With the help of this screen, the user can classify the additional discount types that
will be included in sales invoices. This helps the organization generate reports according to
the selected types and create the serial numbers of the additional discount documents,
which will appear in the invoices; whether Cumulative or By Type, based on the selected
option in the Customers Management System Parameters screen.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable number for
the discount type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the additional discounts type,
which will appear in invoices in the default system language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters name of the additional discounts type that
will appear in invoices in the foreign language defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 64 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Invoices Types

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can classify the types of sales invoices based on
the areas that the organization’s sales activities cover. This helps the organization generate
reports according to the selected types and also create the serial numbers of sales invoice
documents; whether By Type, By Type and Warehouse, or By Type, Warehouse and
Payment Method, based on the selected option in the Customers Management System
Parameters screen.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the sales invoice type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the sales invoices type in the
system's default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the sales invoices type in the
foreign language selected on the system.
- Cash Number: With the help of this field, the user can link the sales invoice type to a
certain cash. Thus, once the sales invoice type is selected, the system automatically
displays the associated cash number noting that that whenever the type selected in the
sales invoice changes, the displayed cash changes accordingly. However, if the
selected type is not linked to a certain cash; the user will have to determine one
manually in the invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 65 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Warehouse Number: This field appears if the Use Multiple Warehouses parameter is
not activated in the Customers Management System Parameters screen. Here, the
user can determine which warehouse will be linked to the selected invoice type. This
way, the system can automatically fetch the sales invoice type once the associated
warehouse, which can be changed as needed, is determined.
Hint: If the selected option in the Sales Invoices Sequence parameter
is By Type, the warehouse number field will not be available in the
sales invoice.
- Payment Method: In this field, the user can determine the payment method that will
be linked to the sales invoice type; whether Cash Sales or Sales on Credit. Thus,
once the invoice type is selected, the system will automatically display the associated
payment method. However, this field will not appear if the selected option in the Sales
Invoices Sequence field is By Payment Method, By Warehouse and Payment
Method, or By Center and Payment Method.
- Default Print Template: In this field, the user can determine which default print form
will be linked to the invoice type and which will appear automatically upon printing the
invoice.
- Activity Tax Number: With the help of this field, the user can determine the tax
number of the activity related to each sales invoice type noting that this number
depends on the codes determined within the Tax Authority and that the user can enter
only the customer-related activities.
- Compensation Invoice: This flag appears when the Use Compensation Quantities
parameter is activated in the Customers Management System Parameters screen
and when ticked, it helps the user distinguish the invoice type that is related to the
compensation granted to the customer.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: In this screen, the user can display the sales invoices that are
linked to the selected type by clicking the button next to the Type
Number field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 66 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Returns Requests Types

Use: This screen appears when the selected option in the Use Sales Return Request
parameter is either Mandatory or Optional. Here, the user can classify the sales return
requests based on the sales invoice types that are defined in the Sales Invoices Types
screen, which helps the organization use request types in the sales returns invoice.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the type of sales return request.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the sales return request type in
the system's default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of sales return request type in
the foreign language selected on the system.
- Compensation: This flag appears if the Use Compensation Quantities parameter is
activated in the Customers Management System Parameters screen and by ticking
it, the user adds the compensation request type that will be used in the Sales Returns
Request screen.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 67 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Returns Types

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can classify the sale returns into different
categories based on the sale invoices types that are defined in the Sales Invoices Types
screen. This helps generate reports based on the selected types and determine the serial
numbers of sale returns invoices documents based on the selected option in the Sales
Returns Invoices Sequence field in the Customers Management System Parameters
screen; whether By Type, By Type and Warehouse, or By Type, Warehouse and
Payment Method.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the sales return type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the sales return type in the
system's default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the sales return type in the
foreign language selected on the system.
- Cash Number: With the help of this field, the user can link the sales return type to a
certain cash. Thus, once the type is determined in the sales return invoice, the system
automatically displays the associated cash number noting that whenever the type
selected in the sale returns invoice changes, the displayed cash number changes

Enterprise Resource Planning 68 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

automatically. However, if the selected type is not linked to a particular cash, the user
will have to determine one manually in the return invoice.
- Default Print Template: In this field, the user can determine which default print form
will be linked to the return type and which will appear automatically upon printing the
sales return invoice.
- Activity Tax Number: With the help of this field, the user can determine the tax
number of the activity related to each sales return invoice type noting that this number
depends on the codes determined within the tax authority and that the user can enter
only the customer-related activities.
- Compensation Invoice Return: This flag helps the user distinguish the type of return
that is related to the compensation invoice granted to the customer.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: In this screen, the user can display the sales return invoices that
are linked to selected type by clicking the button next to the Type
Number field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 69 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Receipt Vouchers Types

Use: This screen appears when the Use Receipt Vouchers parameter is activated in the
Customers Management System Parameters screen. It helps the user classify operation
order receipt vouchers (for devices that need maintenance) which allows them generate
related reports based on the defined types and determine serial numbers needed for the
receipt vouchers documents according to the option selected in the Receipt Vouchers
Sequence parameter within the Customers Management System Parameters screen;
whether Cumulative or By Type.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the receipt voucher type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the receipt voucher type for
devices that need maintenance in the system’s default language. This includes receipt
vouchers for both the devices under maintenance or out of maintenance.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the receipt voucher type in
the foreign language selected on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Hint: In this screen, the user can display the receipt vouchers that are
linked to the selected type by clicking the button next to the Type
Number field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 70 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Returns Reasons

Use: In this screen, the user can determine and classify the reasons behind the sales
return, whether it is related to goods, price, or quality. This helps generate reports based on
the defined categories and suggest solutions for any possible issue noting that determining
the return reason will be mandatory in both the Sales Return and the Return Request
screens if the Enter Return Reason in Returns Is Mandatory parameter is activated in the
Customers Management System Parameters screen.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the sales return reason.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the sales return reason in the system's
default language. For example, off specifications, damaged or defective, overpriced, or
expired.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the sales return reason in the foreign
language defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Note: In this screen, the user can display the sales return invoices that
are linked to the reason listed by clicking the button next to the Type
Number field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 71 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Commissions Coding

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can code the commissions an organization
grants to the customer following the set encouraging policies. This allows the user to
generate reports based on to the types of commissions entered, compare between existing
policies and select most appropriate ones for organization to follow

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the customer commission.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the customer commission in the
system's default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the customer commission in
the foreign language that is defined on the system.
- Commission Type: With the help of this field, the user determines the type of the
commission by selecting one of the following options:
 By Customer: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Customer Number, Customer Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in
detailed data section where the user can determine commission at the customer
level.
 By Customer Group: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in detailed

Enterprise Resource Planning 72 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer group
level.
 By Customer Type: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Customer Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer type
level.
 By Customer Degree: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Customer Grade, Grade Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer grade
level.
 By Region: When the user selects this option, the system displays the Region
Number, Region Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data
section where the user can determine the commission at the region level.
 Customer Classification: When the user selects this option, the system displays
the Classification Number, Classification Name, Commission, and Remarks
columns in the detailed data where the user can determine the commission for
each classification.
- Commission Type by Item: With the help of this field, the user can determine the
type of commission applied by item using one of the following options:
 Unused: When the user selects this option, nothing changes on the screen.
▪ By Item: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Number,
Item Name, Unit, Commission, and Remarks columns in detailed data section
where the user can determine the commission at the item level.
▪ By Items Group: When this option is selected, the system displays the Group
Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the items group
level.
▪ By Item Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item
Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data
section where the user can determine the commission for each item type.

Enterprise Resource Planning 73 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

▪ By Similar Group: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Similar Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns
in detailed data section where the user can determine the commission for each
similar group of items.
▪ By Main Group and Sub-group: When this option is selected, the system
displays the Group Number (main), Group Name, Sub-Group Number,
Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section
where the user can determine the commission for each main and sub-group.
- Use Commissions Segments: Here, the user determines how the commission
segments will be used by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 Net Sales Amount: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master data section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
appears. This field includes two options; Distribute Commission to all
Segments and Calculate Commission on Highest Segment.
▪ In the detailed data section, the From Amount, To Amount, Commission, and
Remarks columns appear, in which the user can determine the commission at
the segment level.
 Sales Plan: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
appears. This field includes two options; Distribute Commission to all
Segments and Calculate Commission on Highest Segment.
▪ In the master section, a new parameter called Separate Target Segments
from Additional Segments appears which when activated a new field called
Additional Segments Calculation appears. This field includes the same two
options previously explained except that they are used to calculate only the
additional segments.
▪ In the detailed data section, the From Percentage, To Percentage,
Commission, and Remarks columns appear where the user can determine the
commission for each plan.
 Payment Term: This option appears when the selected option in the Commission
Type by Item field is Unused, and when selected, the system displays the From,

Enterprise Resource Planning 74 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

To, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section where the
user can determine the commission for each payment period. Payment term refers
to the timeframe within which payment must be made starting from the sales
invoice date. For example, the timeframe determined from 1 to 30 days will have a
commission that differs from that of the timeframe determined from 1 to 60
days...etc. In other words, each payment term would have a separate commission
amount or percentage.
 Quantities: This option appears when the selected option in the Commission
Type by Item field is Unused or By Item and when selected, the system displays
the From Quantity, To Quantity, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can enter the commission for each sold
quantity.
- Calculate Commission By Payment Type: When this parameter is activated, the
system displays the Payment Method, Commission and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can enter the commission for each payment
method.
- Calculate Commission by Currency: When this parameter is activated, the system
displays the Currency column in the detailed data section where the user can code the
customer's commission at the currency level.
- Calculate Commission by Branch: When this parameter is activated, the system
displays the Branch column in the detailed data section where the user can determine
the customer's commission at the branch level.
- Payment Type: This field appears when the selected option in the Commission
Calculation Condition field is Only Paid Sales. Here, the user can determine how the
payment batches are registered by selecting one of the following options:
 Distribute Payment Manually: When this option is selected, the user will need
upon payment to manually determine the debit document for which the payment
batch is made in the receipt voucher.
 Distribute Payment Automatically: When this option is selected, the system will
automatically distribute the customer’s payment from credit documents to the debit
documents.

Enterprise Resource Planning 75 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Commission Type: In this field, the user determines whether the commission will
apply as Percentage or Value.
- Calculation: This field appears in the following cases:
 When the selected option in the Use Commissions Segments fields is
Quantities.
 When the selected option in the Commission Type by Item field is either By Item,
By Items Group, By Item Type, or By Similar Group.
 When the selected option in the Commission Type field is Customer
Classification.
It includes two options; one of which is On Net Sales Amount which means that the
commission will be calculated as a value on the net sales and the other is On Sales Net
Quantity, which means that the commission will be calculated as a quantity on the net
sales.
- Target Segments Calculation: This field appears when the selected option in in the
Use Commissions Segments field is either On Net Sales Amount or Sales Plan. It
includes two options; one of which is Distribute Commission to all Segments which
means that the commission will be calculated for all segments as follows:
 Assuming that the customer achieves the target value specified for all segments,
the system will distribute this achieved value to all defined segments and the result
will be the earned commission.
Due commission
Commission Amount for All when customer
S/N Target Segments Commission
Segments $ achieves all target
segments
1 From 1 – 1000 %2 20
2 From 1001 – 2000 %3 30
140
3 From 2001 – 3000 %4 40
4 From 3001 – 4000 %5 50

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the customer achieves only
2,500$, the system calculates the customer’s commission as follows:
20$ on the first segment + 30$ on the second segment + 20$ on part of the third
segment (500 x 4%), which equals a total due commission of 70$.

Enterprise Resource Planning 76 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

The second option in this field is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment

and in which case the commission is calculated on the highest achieved segment
as follows:
 Assuming that the customer achieves all the target value, the system will calculate
the commission as follows:

Commission Amount on highest value

S/N Target Segments Commission
segment in USD $

1 From 1 – 1,000 2%
The system reads the highest
2 From 1,001 – 2,000 3%
achieved segment value and then
3 From 2,001 – 3,000 4%
multiplies it by the corresponding
percentage, for example here
4 From 3,001 – 4,000 %5
4,000 x 5%

x 200$

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the customer achieves only
2,500$, the system will calculate the commission as follows:
(Achieved Segment Value x corresponding percentage (2,500 x 4%) = $100.
- Separate Target Segments from Additional Segments: This parameter appears
when the selected option in the Use Commissions Segments field is Sales Plan and
when activated the system displays new field called Additional Segments Calculation
in the master data section.
- Additional Segments Calculation: In this field, the user determines how the
commission on additional segments is calculated by selecting one of the following
options:
 The first option is Distribute Commission to All Segments, and in which case the
commission of any additional amount a customer achieves when exceeding target
value will be calculated on all segments defined within the sales plan.
 The second option is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment and in which
case the commission of any additional amount a customer achieves when
exceeding target value is calculated on the highest value segment determined in
the sales plan.

Enterprise Resource Planning 77 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Commission Calculation Condition: This field appears when the selected option in
the Commission Type field is Customer Classification and in the Commission Type
By Item field is By Item. It helps the user determine the commission calculation
condition if any by selecting one of the following options:
 Without Condition: This option means that no conditions are needed for
commission calculation and when selected no changes are rendered on the screen.
 Payment Percent: When this option is selected, the system displays a column
called Payment Percent in the detailed data section, where the user enters the
payment percent that if fulfilled, the customer can obtain their commission.
 Paid Sales Only: When this option is selected, the commission that the customer
receives will be calculated on the total paid sales only.
- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions related to the
commission type defined on this screen. However, this can be undone by unticking the
flag.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation.
- User Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the user who has
deactivated the transactions related to the commission type.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the commission type.
Second: Detailed Data
This part of the screen is closely related to the options selected in the master section. If no
option is selected in the master data section, no data will be rendered and based on the
options selected in the master data, the columns and fields in the detailed section change.
For example, this section may include the data of a specific option or
multiple options in the master section. It may render the data related to
the By Customer option in the Commission Type field, and the data
related to the By Item option in the Commission By Item field, as well
as the data related to the Net Sales Amount option in Use
Commission Segments field all together. Similarly, this applies to all
other options included in the master data fields.

Enterprise Resource Planning 78 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Detailed Data Entry: In general, all the detailed data that appear based on the options
determined in the master section are filled in through one of the following methods:
 Fetching from a list by pressing the F9 button.
 Manual Entry.
 Selection
Third: Fetch Options
With the help of the fields in this tab, the user can filter the data that will be fetched to the
detailed section, noting that these fields change based on the options selected in the master
data section. Once the user fills in the required data by pressing the F9 button and then
clicking the Fetch Data button, the system displays them in the detailed section.

.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 79 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Representatives Commissions Coding

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can code the commissions that an organization
will grant the sales representatives as per the incentive scheme set for sales increase, and
generate related reports based on the determined commissions.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the representative commission type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the representative commission
type in the system's default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the representative
commission type in the foreign language defined on the system.
- Commission Type for Representatives: With the help of this field, the user
determines the type of the commission by selecting one of the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, no impact is rendered on the screen.
 By Representative: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Representative Number, Representative Name, Commission, and Remarks
columns in detailed data section where the user can determine the commission for
each representative.
 By Representative Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Representative Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the

Enterprise Resource Planning 80 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

detailed data section where the user can determine the commission for each
representative type.
- Commission Type for Customers: This field includes the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, no impact is rendered on the screen.
 By Customer Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Customer Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer type
level.
 By Customer Group: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can determine the commission at the
customer group level.
- Commission Type by Item: With the help of this field, the user can determine the
type of commission applied by item using one of the following options:
 Unused: If this option is selected, the commission will not be calculated by item.
 By Item: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Number, Item
Name, Unit, Commission, and Remarks columns in detailed data section where
the user can determine the commission at the item level.
 By Item Group: When this option is selected, the system displays the Group
Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data
section where the user can determine the commission at the items group level.
 By Item Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Type,
Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section
where the user can determine the commission for each item type.
 By Similar Group: When this option is selected, the system displays the Similar
Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission for each similar group
of items.
 By Main Group and Sub-group: When this option is selected, the system
displays the Group Number (main), Group Name, Sub-Group Number, Group
Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section where the
user can determine the commission for each main and sub-group.

Enterprise Resource Planning 81 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 By Item Classification: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item
Classification, Classification Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data to determine the commission for each item classification.
- Use Commissions Segments: Here, the user determines how the commission
segments will be used by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
▪ Net Sales Amount: When this option is selected, the following happens:
➢ In the master data section, another field called Target Segments
Calculation appears. This field includes two options; one of which is
Distribute Commission to all Segments and the other is Calculate
Commission on Highest Segment.
➢ In the detailed data section, the system displays the From Amount, To
Amount, Commission, and Remarks columns in which the user can
determine the commission at the segment level.
▪ Sales Plan: When this option is selected, the following happens:
➢ In the master section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
appears. This field includes two options; one of which is Distribute
Commission to all Segments and the other is Calculate Commission on
Highest Segment.
➢ In the master section, a new parameter called Separate Target Segments
from Additional Segments appears, which when activated a new field called
Additional Segments Calculation appears. This field includes the same two
options previously explained except that they are used to calculate only the
additional segments.
▪ In the detailed data section, the system displays the From Percentage, To
Percentage, Commission, and Remarks columns where the user can
determine the commission for each plan.
▪ Payment Term: This option appears when the selected option in the
Commission Type by Item field is Unused, and when selected, the system
displays the From, To, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission for each payment

Enterprise Resource Planning 82 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

period. Payment term refers to the timeframe within which payment must be
made starting from the sales invoice date. For example, the timeframe
determined from 1 to 30 days will have a commission that is different from that
of the timeframe determined from 1 to 60 days...etc. In other words, each
payment term will have a separate commission amount or percentage.
▪ Quantities: This option appears when the selected option in the Commission
Type field is By Item and when selected, the system displays the From
Quantity, To Quantity, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can enter the commission for each sold quantity.
▪ Profit Margin Amount: When this option is selected, the system displays the
From, To, Commission, Remarks columns in the detailed data section where
the user can enter the commission for each segment.
- Location: In this field, the user selects one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, it nothing changes on the screen.
 By Country/ Governorate/ City/ Region: When one of these options is selected,
the system displays the Option Number, Option Name, Commission, and
Remarks columns in the detailed data section where the user can determine the
commission for each location option.
- Commission Type: In this field, the user determines whether the commission will be
applied Percentage or Value.
- Calculation: This field appears with the On Net Sales Amount option set by default
when the selected option in the Use Commissions Segments field is Quantities.
- By Quantity Multiplications: This flag appears when the selected option in the Use
Commissions Segments field is Quantities and when activated the system displays a
column called Quantity Multiplications in the detailed data section where the user
needs to determine the multiplications of sold quantities so that the system could apply
and calculate the commission.
For example, if the quantity multiplication entered is five and the
commission determined is one, this means that the representative will
get one unit on every five units sold. Similarly, if the total sales equals
ten, the commission that the representative will receive will be two units,
and so on.

Enterprise Resource Planning 83 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Target Segments Calculation: This field appears when the selected option in the Use
Commissions Segments field is either On Net Sales Amount or Sales Plan. It
includes two options; one of which is Distribute Commission to all Segments which
means that the commission will be calculated for all segments as follows:
 Assuming that the representative achieves the target value specified for all
segments, the system will distribute this achieved value to all defined segments
and the result will be the earned commission.
Due commission
Commission Amount for when customer
S/N Target Segments Commission
All Segments $ achieves all
target segments
1 From 1 – 1000 %2 20
2 From 1001 – 2000 %3 30
140
3 From 2001 – 3000 %4 40
4 From 3001 – 4000 %5 50

Due commission
Commission Amount for when customer
S/N Target Segments Commission
All Segments $ achieves all
target segments
1 From 1 – 1000 %2 20
2 From 1001 – 2000 %3 30
140
3 From 2001 – 3000 %4 40
4 From 3001 – 4000 %5 50

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the representative achieves
only 2,500$, the system calculates the commission as follows:
20$ on the first segment + 30$ on the second segment + 20$ on part of the third
segment (500 x 4%), which equals a total due commission of 70$
The second option in this field is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment
and in which case the commission is calculated on the highest achieved segment
as follows:
 Assuming that the representative achieves all the target value, the system will
calculate the commission as follows:

Enterprise Resource Planning 84 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Commission Amount on highest

S/N Target Segments Commission
value segment in USD $

1 From 1 – 1,000 2% The system reads the highest

2 From 1,001 – 2,000 3% achieved segment value and then
3 From 2,001 – 3,000 4% multiplies it by the corresponding
percentage, for example here
4 From 3,001 – 4,000 %5
4,000 x 5%

x 200$

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the representative achieves
only 2,500$, the system will calculate the commission as follows:
(Achieved Segment Value x corresponding percentage (2,500 x 4%) = $100.
- Separate Target Segments from Additional Segments: This parameter appears
when the selected option in the Use Commissions Segments field is Sales Plan and
when activated the system displays new field called Additional Segments Calculation
in the master data section.
- Additional Segments Calculation: In this field, the user determines how the
commission on additional segments is calculated by selecting one of the following
options:
 The first option is Distribute Commission to All Segments, and in which case the
commission of any additional amount a representative achieves when exceeding
target value will be calculated on all segments defined within the sales plan.
- The second option is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment and in which case
the commission of any additional amount a representative achieves when exceeding
target value is calculated on the highest value segment determined in the sales plan.
- Link Commission to Representative Collection: This parameter appears if the
selected option in the Commission Type by Item field is By Items Group or By Item
and when activated, the system displays the Commission Calculation Policy field
and the organization can link the representative commission to the amounts collected
from the customer debt.

Enterprise Resource Planning 85 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Commission Calculation Policy: This field appears if the previously mentioned Link
Commission to Representative Collection parameter is activated. It helps the user
determine the appropriate collection calculation policy from the list of types defined in
the Representative Persons Collection Calculation screen, which appears when
pressing the F9 button.
- Calculate Commission for Main Representative: This parameter is used if the
representative is linked to a main representative in the Representatives Data screen,
and when activated, the system calculates the commission for the main representative
on the sales that the representative they manage achieve.
- Calculate Commission On Collected Amount: This parameter appears when the
selected option in the Commission Type by Item field is Unused and when activated,
the system calculated the commission based on the amount collected from the invoice.
- Calculate Commission by Payment Type: When this parameter is activated, the
system displays the Payment Method, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can enter the data corresponding to each
payment method.
- Start Payment Term on Due Date: This parameter appears when the selected option
in the Use Commissions Segments field is Payment Term and when activated, the
start of the payment term is calculated as of the due date determined in the
Commission Calculation screen.
- Calculate Commission By Pricing Level: Representative commission can be
calculated based on the pricing level if the Show Pricing Level In Sales Transactions
Screens parameter is activated in Customer Management System Parameters
screen. This flag appears if the option selected in the Commission Type field is By
Item, and in the Use Commission Segments field is either Unused, Net Sales
Amount, or Quantities, and the determined commission type is Value or Percentage,
and when activated the commission is coded based on the pricing level. In other
words, the sales commission will be calculated for each pricing level independently.
For example, the retail pricing level sales commission is different from that of the
wholesale pricing level.
- Inactive: When this flag is activated, the system stops any transactions related to the
commission type defined in this screen. However, this action can be undone when the
user unticks this flag.

Enterprise Resource Planning 86 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation.
- User Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the user who has
deactivated the transactions related to the commission type.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user enters the reason for deactivating the
transactions related to the commission.
Second: Detailed Data
This part of the screen is closely related to the options selected in the master section. If no
option is selected in the master data section, no data will be rendered and based on the
options selected in the master data, the detailed data columns and fields change.
For example, this section may include the data of a specific option in the master data, or
the data for multiple options. And, it may render the data related to the By Customer option
in the Commission Type field, and the data related to the By Item option in the
Commission By Item field, as well as the data related to the Net Sales Amount option in
Use Commission Segments field all together. Similarly, this applies to all other options
included in the master data fields.
- Detailed Data Entry: In general, all the detailed data that appear based on the options
determined in the master data are filled in through one of the following methods:
 Fetching from a list by pressing the F9 button.
 Manual Entry.
 Selection.
Third: Fetch Options
With the help of the fields in this tab, the user can filter the data that will be fetched to the
detailed section, noting that these fields change based on the options selected in the master
data section. Once the user fills in the required data by pressing the F9 button and then
clicking the Fetch Data button, the system displays them in the detailed section.

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 87 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Representative Persons Collection Calculation

Use: In this screen, the user can define how the amounts that the representatives collect
are calculated and link them to the Representatives Commissions Coding screen where
the commissions are calculated based on the actual amounts collected from customers, if
the commission is linked to the amounts collected.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
First: Master Data
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the calculation method.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the calculation
method in the system's default language.
- Foreign Name: Here, the user the name that will refer to the calculation method in the
foreign language determined on the system.
- Representative Commission Type: With the help of this field, the user selects
determines the type of representative’s commission by selecting one of the following
options:
 General: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 By Representative: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Representative Number, Representative Name, Commission, Remarks in the

Enterprise Resource Planning 88 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

detailed data section where the user can select and determine commission for each
representative.
 By Representative Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Representative Type, Type Name, Commission, Remarks in the detailed data
section where the user can select and determine the commission for each type.
- Location: In this field, the user selects one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, it nothing changes on the screen.
 By Country/ Governorate/ City/ Region: When one of these options is selected,
the system displays the Option Number, Option Name, Commission, and
Remarks columns in the detailed data section where the user can determine the
commission for each location option.
- Commission Type for Customers: This field includes the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, no impact is rendered on the screen.
 By Customer Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Customer Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer type
level.
 By Customer Group: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can determine the commission at the
customer group level.
- Use Commissions Segments: Here, the user determines how the commission
segments will be used by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 Payment Term: When this option is selected, the system displays the From, To,
Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section where the user
can determine the commission for each payment period. Payment term refers to
the timeframe within which payment must be made starting from the sales invoice
date noting that each payment term will have a separate commission amount or
percentage.

Enterprise Resource Planning 89 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Payment To Credit Period Ratio: In this field, the user determines the ratio
between the payment timeframe and the credit period. If the credit period is 30
days and due payment is made during 15 days, the ratio will be 50%.
- Payment Type: This field appears when the selected option in the Commission
Calculation Condition field is Only Paid Sales. Here, the user can determine how the
payment batches are registered by selecting one of the following options:
 Distribute Payment Manually: When this option is selected, the user will need
upon payment to manually determine the debit document for which the payment
batch is made in the receipt voucher.
 Distribute Payment Automatically: When this option is selected, the system will
automatically distribute the customer’s payment from credit documents to the debit
documents.
- Paid Amount Calculation: Here, the user determines how the paid amount is
calculated by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 By Fully Paid Invoices: When this option is selected, the system calculates the
representative commission per each fully paid invoice.
 By Collected Amounts: When this option is selected, the system calculates the
representative commission according to the actually collected amounts.
- Commission Granting: In this field, the user can determine how the commission is
calculated for the representative, i.e., whether the representative obtains a sale
commission on the sales price or a collection commission that is calculated on the
collected amount, noting that this allows the user to link the representative commission
to the commission earned on collection. This is done by selecting one of the following
options:
 Calculate Commission (On Collected Amounts): When this option is selected,
the system will calculate the commission on the amounts collected rather than the
sales based on the collection policy that is specified on the system.
 Add to Selling Commission: When this option is selected, the system calculates
the commission on collected amounts and then adds it to the selling commission
that is calculated for the representative as per the settings configured on the
Representatives Commissions Coding screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 90 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Commission Type: In this field, the user determines whether the commission will
apply as Percentage or Value.
Third: Fetch Options
With the help of the fields in this tab, the user can filter the data that will be fetched to the
detailed section, noting that these fields change based on the options selected in the master
data section. Once the user fills in the required data by pressing the F9 button and then
clicking the Fetch Data button, the system displays them in the detailed section.

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 91 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Collectors Commissions Coding

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can code the commissions an organization
decides to grant to the collectors as per the incentive policies set to encourage the
collectors increase the collection of resources. It also helps the user generate reports based
on the types of commissions determined.

How To Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
First: Master Data
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays modifiable serial number
for the collector commission.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the commission
type in the system's default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the commission
type in the foreign language determined on the system.
- Commission Type: With the help of this field, the user determines the type of the
commission by selecting one of the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 By Collector: When this option is selected, the system displays the Collector
Number, Collector Name, Commission, Remarks columns in the detailed section
where the user can select and determine commission for each collector.

Enterprise Resource Planning 92 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 By Collector/Center: When this option is selected, the system displays the

Collector Number, Collector Name Cost Center, Commission, Remarks in the
detailed section where the user can select and determine commission for each
collector.
- Commission Type for Customers: This field includes the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, no impact is rendered on the screen.
 By Customer Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Customer Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer type
level.
 By Customer Group: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can determine the commission at the
customer group level.
 By Region: When the user selects this option, the system displays the Region
Number, Region Name, Commission, Remarks where the user can determine
the commission for each region.
- Use Commissions Segments: Here, the user determines how the commission
segments will be used by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 Collected Amount: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master data section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
that includes two options, one of which is Distribute Commission to all
Segments and the other is Calculate Commission on Highest Segment.
▪ In the detailed section, the system displays the From Amount, To Amount,
Commission, Remarks columns in which the user can determine the
commission for each segment.
 Collectors Plan: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master data section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
which includes two options, one of which is Distribute Commission to all
Segments and the other is Calculate Commission on Highest Segment.

Enterprise Resource Planning 93 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

▪ In the master section, a new parameter called Separate Target Segments

from Additional Segments appears, which when activated another field called
Additional Segments Calculation appears. This field includes the same two
options previously explained except that they are used to calculate only the
additional segments.
▪ In the detailed data section, the system displays the From Percentage, To
Percentage, Commission, Remarks columns where the user can determine
the commission for each plan.
 Payment Term: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master data section, the system displays two new fields one of which is
called Distribution and includes two options; Distribute Payment Manually
and Distribute Payment Automatically, whereas the other field is called
Target Segments Calculation and includes the option Calculate Commission
on Highest Segment that appears automatically.
▪ In the detailed data section, the system displays the From, To, Commission,
Remarks columns where the user can determine the commission for each
payment term. Payment term refers to the timeframe within which payment
must be made starting from the sales invoice date. For example, the timeframe
determined from (1) to (30) days will have a commission that is different from
that of the timeframe determined from (1) to (60) days...etc.
- Calculation: With the help of this field, the user can determine whether the
commission will be calculated as Percentage or Amount.
- Target Segment Calculation: This field appears when the selected option in in the
Use Commissions Segments field is Collected Amount, Collectors Plan or
Payment Term. It includes two options, one of which is Distribute Commission to all
Segments which means that the commission will be calculated for all segments as
follows:
 Assuming that the collector achieves the target value specified for all segments, the
system will distribute this achieved value to all defined segments and the result will
be the earned commission.
Commission Amount Due commission when customer
S/N Target Segments Commission
for All Segments $ achieves all target segments

Enterprise Resource Planning 94 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

1 From 1 – 1000 %2 20
From 1001 –
2 %3 30
2000
From 2001 – 140
3 %4 40
3000
From 3001 –
4 %5 50
4000

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the collector achieves only
2,500$, the system calculates the commission as follows:
20$ on the first segment + 30$ on the second segment + 20$ on part of the third
segment (500 x 4%), which equals a total due commission of 70$.
The second option in this field is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment and in
which case the commission is calculated on the highest achieved segment as follows:
 Assuming that the collector achieves all the target value, the system will calculate
the commission as follows:
Commission Amount on highest
S/N Target Segments Commission
value segment in USD $
1 From 1 – 1,000 2% The system reads the highest
2 From 1,001 – 2,000 3% achieved segment value and then
3 From 2,001 – 3,000 4%
multiplies it by the corresponding

4 From 3,001 – 4,000 %5

percentage, for example here
4,000 x 5%
200$

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the collector achieves only
2,500$, the system will calculate the commission as follows:
(Achieved Segment Value x corresponding percentage (2,500 x 4%) = $100.
- Separate Target Segments from Additional Segments: This parameter appears
when the selected option in the Use Commissions Segments field is Collectors Plan
and when activated the system displays new field called Additional Segments
Calculation in the master data section.
- Additional Segments Calculation: In this field, the user determines how the
commission on additional segments is calculated by selecting one of the following
options:

Enterprise Resource Planning 95 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 The first option is Distribute Commission to All Segments, and in which case the
commission of any additional amount a collector achieves when exceeding target
value will be calculated on all segments defined within the collectors’ plan.
 The second option is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment and in which
case the commission of any additional amount a collector achieves when exceeding
target value is calculated on the highest value segment determined in the
collectors' plan.
Second: Detailed Data
This part of the screen is closely related to the options selected in the master section. If no
option is selected in the master data section, no data will be rendered and based on the
options selected in the master data, the columns and fields in the detailed section change.
For example, this section may include the data of a specific option or
multiple options in the master section. It may render the data related to
the By Customer option in the Commission Type field, and the data
related to the By Item option in the Commission By Item field, as well
as the data related to the Net Sales Amount option in Use
Commission Segments field all together. Similarly, this applies to all
other options included in the master data fields.
- Detailed Data Entry: In general, all the detailed data that appear based on the options
determined in the master section are filled in through one of the following methods:
 Fetching from a list by pressing the F9 button.
 Manual Entry.
 Selection.
Third: Fetch Options
With the help of the fields in this tab, the user can filter the data that will be fetched to the
detailed section, noting that these fields change based on the options selected in the master
data section. Once the user fills in the required data by pressing the F9 button and then
clicking the Fetch Data button, the system displays them in the detailed section.

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 96 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Employees Commissions Coding

Use: This screen helps the user code the commissions an organization decides to grant to
the employees involved in the selling process or representatives’ supervision as per the
incentive policies set to encourage the employees to increase the sales. It also helps the
user generate related reports based on the defined types of commissions.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
First: Master Data
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the employee’s commission.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the employee’s
commission in the system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the employee's
commission in the foreign language defined on the system.
- Employees Commission Type: In this field, the user determines the type of
commission an employee will receive by selecting one of the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 By Employee: When this option is selected, the system displays the Employee
Number, Employee Name, Commission, Remarks columns in the detailed data
section where the user can determine the commission for each employee.

Enterprise Resource Planning 97 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Commission Type for Customers: In this field, the user determines the type of the
customer-related commission by selecting one of the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, noting changes on the screen.
 By Customer Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Customer Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer type
level.
 By Customer Group: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can determine the commission at the
customer group level.
- Commission Type by Item: With the help of this field, the user can determine the
type of commission applied by item using one of the following options:
 Unused: When the user selects this option, nothing changes on the screen.
 By Item: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Number, Item
Name, Unit, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section
where the user can determine the commission at the item level.
 By Item Group: When this option is selected, the system displays the Group
Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data
section where the user can determine the commission at the items group level.
 By Item Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Type,
Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section
where the user can determine the commission for each item type.
 By Item Classification: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item
Classification, Classification Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data to determine the commission for each item classification.
- Use Commissions Segments: Here, the user determines how the commission
segments will be used by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 Net Sales Amount: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master data section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
appears. This field includes two options; one of which is Distribute

Enterprise Resource Planning 98 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Commission to all Segments and the other is Calculate Commission on

Highest Segment.
▪ In the detailed data section, the system displays the From Amount, To
Amount, Commission, and Remarks columns in which the user can determine
the commission at the segment level.
 Sales Plan: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
appears. This field includes two options; one of which is Distribute
Commission to all Segments and the other is Calculate Commission on
Highest Segment.
▪ In the master section, a new parameter called Separate Target Segments
from Additional Segments appears which when activated a new field called
Additional Segments Calculation appears. This field includes the same two
options previously explained except that they are used to calculate only the
additional segments.
▪ In the detailed data section, the system displays the From Percentage, To
Percentage, Commission, and Remarks columns where the user can
determine the commission for each plan.
- Calculate Commission By Payment Type: When this parameter is activated, the
system displays the Payment Method, Commission and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can enter the commission for each payment
method.
- Commission Type: In this field, the user determines whether the commission will
apply as Percentage or Value.
- Calculate Target Method: Target Segments Calculation: This field appears when
the selected option in in the Use Commissions Segments field is either On Net Sales
Amount or Sales Plan. It includes two options; one of which is Distribute
Commission to all Segments which means that the commission will be calculated for
all segments as follows:
 Assuming that the employee achieves the target value specified for all segments,
the system will distribute this achieved value to all defined segments and the result
will be the earned commission.

Enterprise Resource Planning 99 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Due commission
Commission Amount for when customer
S/N Target Segments Commission
All Segments $ achieves all
target segments
1 From 1 – 1000 %2 20
2 From 1001 – 2000 %3 30
140
3 From 2001 – 3000 %4 40
4 From 3001 – 4000 %5 50

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the employee achieves only
2,500$, the system calculates the commission as follows:
20$ on the first segment + 30$ on the second segment + 20$ on part of the third
segment (500 x 4%), which equals a total due commission of 70$.
The second option in this field is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment
and in which case the commission is calculated on the highest achieved segment
as follows:
 Assuming that the employee achieves all the target value, the system will calculate
the commission as follows:

Commission Amount on highest

S/N Target Segments Commission
value segment in USD $

1 From 1 – 1,000 2%

2 From 1,001 – 2,000 3% The system reads the highest

3 From 2,001 – 3,000 4% achieved segment value and then
multiplies it by the corresponding
percentage, for example here
4 From 3,001 – 4,000 %5
4,000 x 5%

x 200$

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the customer achieves only
2,500$, the system will calculate the commission as follows:
(Achieved Segment Value x corresponding percentage (2,500 x 4%) = $100.

Enterprise Resource Planning 100 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Separate Target Segments from Additional Segments: This parameter appears

when the selected option in the Use Commissions Segments field is Sales Plan and
when activated the system displays new field called Additional Segments Calculation
in the master data section.
- Additional Segments Calculation: In this field, the user determines how the
commission on additional segments is calculated by selecting one of the following
options:
 The first option is Distribute Commission to All Segments, and in which case the
commission of any additional amount an employee achieves when exceeding target
value will be calculated on all segments defined within the sales plan.
 The second option is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment and in which
case the commission of any additional amount an employee achieves when
exceeding target value is calculated on the highest value segment determined in
the sales plan.
- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions related to the
commission type defined on this screen. However, this can be undone by unticking the
flag.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation.
- User Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the user who has
deactivated the transactions related to the commission type.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the commission type.
Second: Detailed Data
This part of the screen is closely related to the options selected in the master section. If no
option is selected in the master data section, no data will be rendered and based on the
options selected in the master data, the columns and fields in the detailed section change.
For example, this section may include the data of a specific option or
multiple options in the master section. It may render the data related to
the By Customer option in the Commission Type field, and the data
related to the By Item option in the Commission By Item field, as well
as the data related to the Net Sales Amount option in Use

Enterprise Resource Planning 101 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Commission Segments field all together. Similarly, this applies to all

other options included in the master data fields.
- Detailed Data Entry: In general, all the detailed data that appear based on the options
determined in the master section are filled in through one of the following methods:
 Fetching from a list by pressing the F9 button.
 Manual Entry.
 Selection.
Third: Fetch Options
With the help of the fields in this tab, the user can filter the data that will be fetched to the
detailed section, noting that these fields change based on the options selected in the master
data section. Once the user fills in the required data by pressing the F9 button and then
clicking the Fetch Data button, the system displays them in the detailed section.

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 102 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Marketeers Commissions Coding

Use: This screen helps the user code the commissions that an organization decides to
grant to marketeers as per the incentive policies set to encourage marketeers to increase
sales. It also helps the user generate related reports according to the defined types of
commissions.

How to Use Screen

The screen is used after clicking “Add” button as follows:
First: Master Data
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the marketeer commission.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the marketeer
commission in the system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: Here, the user the name that will refer to the marketeer commission in
the foreign language determined on the system.
- Commission Type for Marketeer: In this field, the user determines the type of
commission that a marketeer will receive by selecting one of the following options:
 General: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 By Marketeer: When this option is selected, the system displays the Marketeer
Number, Marketeer Name, Commission, Remarks columns in the detailed data
section where the user can determine commission for each marketeer.
- Commission Type for Customers: In this field, the user determines the type of the
customer-related commission by selecting one of the following options:

Enterprise Resource Planning 103 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 General: When this option is selected, noting changes on the screen.

 By Customer Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the
Customer Type, Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed
data section where the user can determine the commission at the customer type
level.
 By Customer Group: When the user selects this option, the system displays the
Group Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can determine the commission at the
customer group level.
- Commission Type by Item: With the help of this field, the user can determine the
type of commission applied by item using one of the following options:
 Unused: When the user selects this option, nothing changes on the screen.
 By Item: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Number, Item
Name, Unit, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section
where the user can determine the commission at the item level.
 By Item Group: When this option is selected, the system displays the Group
Number, Group Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data
section where the user can determine the commission at the items group level.
 By Item Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Type,
Type Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section
where the user can determine the commission for each item type.
 By Main Group and Sub-group: When this option is selected, the system
displays the Group Number (main), Group Name, Sub-Group Number, Group
Name, Commission, and Remarks columns in the detailed data section where the
user can determine the commission for each main and sub-group.
- Use Commissions Segments: Here, the user determines how the commission
segments will be used by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, nothing changes on the screen.
 Net Sales Amount: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the detailed data section, the From Amount, To Amount, Commission, and
Remarks columns appear, in which the user can determine the commission at
the segment level.

Enterprise Resource Planning 104 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

▪ In the master data section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
appears. This field includes two options; Distribute Commission to all
Segments and Calculate Commission on Highest Segment.
 Sales Plan: When this option is selected, the following happens:
▪ In the master section, another field called Target Segments Calculation
appears. This field includes two options; Distribute Commission to all
Segments and Calculate Commission on Highest Segment.
▪ In the master section, a new parameter called Separate Target Segments
from Additional Segments appears which when activated a new field called
Additional Segments Calculation appears. This field includes the same two
options previously explained except that they are used to calculate only the
additional segments.
▪ In the detailed data section, the From Percentage, To Percentage,
Commission, and Remarks columns appear where the user can determine the
commission for each plan.
 Quantities: This option appears when the selected option in the Commission
Type by Item field is By item, and when selected the following happens:
▪ In the detailed data section, the system displays the From Quantity, To
Quantity, Commission, Remarks columns where the user can determine the
commission for each sold quantity.
▪ In the master data section, two fields appear; one of which is Target Segments
calculation in which the Calculate Commission on Highest Segment option
is selected automatically, and the other one is the Calculation field in which the
On Net Sales Amount option is selected automatically.
 Profit Margin Amount: When this option is selected, the system displays the
From, To, Commission, Remarks columns in the detailed data section where the
user can enter the commission for each segment.
- Commission Type: In this field, the user determines whether the commission will be
applied Percentage or Value.
- Calculation: This field appears with the On Net Sales Amount option set
automatically when the selected option in the Use Commissions Segments field is
Quantities.

Enterprise Resource Planning 105 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Target Segments Calculation: This field appears when the selected option in in the
Use Commissions Segments field is On Net Sales Amount, Sales Plan or Profit
Margin Amount. It includes two options; one of which is Distribute Commission to
all Target Segments which means that the commission will be calculated for all
segments as follows:
 Assuming that the marketeer achieves the target value specified for all segments,
the system will distribute this achieved value to all defined segments and the result
will be the earned commission.
Due commission
Commission Amount for when customer
S/N Target Segments Commission
All Segments $ achieves all
target segments
1 From 1 – 1000 %2 20
2 From 1001 – 2000 %3 30
140
3 From 2001 – 3000 %4 40
4 From 3001 – 4000 %5 50

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the marketeer achieves
only 2,500$, the system calculates the commission as follows:
20$ on the first segment + 30$ on the second segment + 20$ on part of the third
segment (500 x 4%), which equals a total due commission of 70$.
The second option in this field is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment
and in which case the commission is calculated on the highest achieved segment
as follows:
 Assuming that the marketeer achieves all the target value, the system will calculate
the commission as follows:

Commission Amount on highest

S/N Target Segments Commission
value segment in USD $

The system reads the highest

1 From 1 – 1,000 2%
achieved segment value and then
multiplies it by the corresponding
2 From 1,001 – 2,000 3%
percentage, for example here
3 From 2,001 – 3,000 4%

Enterprise Resource Planning 106 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

4 From 3,001 – 4,000 %5 4,000 x 5%

x 200$

 Referring back to the previous table and assuming that the marketeer achieves
only 2,500$, the system will calculate the commission as follows:
(Achieved Segment Value x corresponding percentage (2,500 x 4%) = $100.
- Additional Segments Calculation: In this field, the user determines how the
commission on additional segments is calculated by selecting one of the following
options:
 The first option is Distribute Commission to All Segments, and in which case the
commission of any additional amount a marketer achieves when exceeding target
value will be calculated on all segments defined within the sales plan.
 The second option is Calculate Commission On Highest Segment and in which
case the commission of any additional amount a marketer achieves when
exceeding target value is calculated on the highest value segment determined in
the sales plan.
- Calculate Commission by Payment Type: When this parameter is activated, the
system displays the Payment Method, Commission and Remarks columns in the
detailed data section where the user can enter the commission for each payment
method.
- By Quantity Multiplications: This flag appears when the selected option in the Use
Commissions Segments field is Quantities and when activated the system displays a
column called Quantity Multiplications in the detailed data section where the user
needs to determine the multiplications of sold quantities so that the system could apply
and calculate the commission. For example, if the quantity multiplication entered is five
and the commission determined is one, this means that the representative will get one
unit on every five units sold. Similarly, if the total sales equals ten, the commission that
the representative will receive will be two units, and so on.
- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions related to the
commission type defined on this screen. However, this can be undone by unticking the
flag.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation.

Enterprise Resource Planning 107 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- User Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the user who has
deactivated the transactions related to the commission type.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the commission type.
Second: Detailed Data
This part of the screen is closely related to the options selected in the master section. If no
option is selected in the master data section, no data will be rendered and based on the
options selected in the master data, the columns and fields in the detailed section change.
For example, this section may include the data of a specific option or
multiple options in the master section. It may render the data related to
the By Customer option in the Commission Type field, and the data
related to the By Item option in the Commission By Item field, as well
as the data related to the Net Sales Amount option in Use
Commission Segments field all together. Similarly, this applies to all
other options included in the master data fields.
- Detailed Data Entry: In general, all the detailed data that appear based on the options
determined in the master section are filled in through one of the following methods:
 Fetching from a list by pressing the F9 button.
 Manual Entry.
 Selection.
Third: Fetch Options
With the help of the fields in this tab, the user can filter the data that will be fetched to the
detailed section, noting that these fields change based on the options selected in the master
data section. Once the user fills in the required data by pressing the F9 button and then
clicking the Fetch Data button, the system displays them in the detailed section.

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 108 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Coupons Types
Use: In this screen, the user can code the different types of coupons that an organization
gives to its customers as per the adopted sales and marketing policies noting that these
coupons are vouchers issued to a specific beneficiary for marketing purposes upon sale.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
First: Master Data
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the coupon type.
- Type Name/ Foreign Name: In these fields, the user enters the name of the coupon
in the default and foreign languages defined on the system respectively.
- For Fuel Stations System: When this flag is activated, the following happens:
 The user will be able to include the coupon type defined on this screen in the fuel
stations system,
 The system will display the Coupon Prices Discrepancies Account field where
the user can enter the account number in which the price discrepancies is
recorded.
 The Exchange for Items option in the Coupon Usage field, and the By Quantity
option in the Coupon Exchange field will be mandatory.
- Coupon Classification: In this field, the user determines whether the coupons are
Internal i.e. issued by the organization or External i.e. issued by a third party and will
be used inside the organization.

Enterprise Resource Planning 109 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Coupon Usage: In this field, the user can select the Exchange for Cash option, which
enables the customer to use the value of one or more coupons to purchase any item
or pay part of the invoice value. Alternatively, the user can select Exchange for Items
if the organization’s policy allows the user to exchange the coupons directly for the
items defined in the Items tab on this screen.
- Coupon Exchange: This field appears if the option selected in the Coupon Usage
field is Exchange for Items. It includes two options; one which is By Value and the
other is By Quantity.
- Tax Rate: This field appears if the selected option in the Coupon Usage field is
Exchange for Items. Here, the user enters the tax rate that applies to the defined
coupon if any.
- Number of Digits in Coupon Serial Number: In this field, the user determines the
length of the coupon serial number for example 4, 5, or 6 digits.
- Coupons Sales Intermediary Account: In this field, the user determines the account
that represents the credit side to which the value of the sold coupons is transferred and
which is defined in the Intermediary Accounts screen.
- Use Coupons Book: This flag appears when the type of coupon coded on the screen
is book and when activated the system displays the following fields:
 Book Category Code: In this field, the user determines a code for each coupon
book type.
 Link Book to Customer Code: Ticking this flag allows the system to link the book
to a certain customer number. This way the coupon book will only be used with
that specific number.
 Include Category Code in Book Serial Number: With the help of this flag, the
user can determine whether the coupon category code will be included in the book
serial number or not.
 Number of Coupons in Book: In this field, the user determines the number of
coupons that will be included in the book.
 Book Sequencing: With the help of this field, the user can determine whether the
serial numbers of the coupon books will be General for all types of books or By
Type i.e. each book will have a unique number based on its type.

Enterprise Resource Planning 110 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Book Pricing: In this field, the user determines how the pricing is made for
coupons; whether By Book or By Coupon.
 Book Default Price: In this field, the user specifies the book's default selling price,
which can be modified based on the maximum and minimum price limits defined.
 • Minimum Price: In this field, the user determines the book's minimum price limit.
 Maximum Price: In this field, the user determines the book's maximum price limit.
 Description: Here, the user needs to enter an explanatory description of the
coupon.
 Discount Account Number: In this field, the user selects the number of the
coupon discount account from the Chart of Accounts by pressing the F9 button.
 Update Book Default Price Upon Selling Coupon: Ticking this flag allows the
system to permit updates on the book’s default price when selling one or more
coupons from the book.
 Book Serial Number Digits: In this field, the user determines the number of digits
that comprise the serial number of the book, for example, the serial number may
contain 4, 5, or 6 digits.
Second: Additional Data
In this tab, the user can record any additional data related to the coupon and which is not
included in the rest of the screen tabs noting that these fields can be renamed as needed
using the Text Translation screen under General System Configuration. This helps
generate various related reports based on the types of coupons defined.

Third: Items
This tab appears when the selected option in the Coupon Usage field is Exchange for
Items. Here, the user can define the items that the coupons can be exchanged for.

Enterprise Resource Planning 111 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 112 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Discount Card Types

Use: This screen appears if the Using Discount Cards parameter is activated in the
Customers Management System Parameters screen. Here, the user can define the types
of discount cards that will be granted to cash customers to use with multiple payments to
obtain a special discount on cash sales invoices at points of sale.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the discount type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the discount card
type in the default language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name that will refer to the discount
card type in the foreign language defined on the system.
- Sales Minimum Limit: In this field, the user determines the minimum number of sales
that the invoice value should be equal or greater than so that the customer can be
granted the discount.
- Discount Type: In this field, the user determines how the discount type will be
calculated for the defined card; whether as Percentage or Amount.
- Value: In this field, the user determines the value or percentage of the discount
associated with the defined card.

Enterprise Resource Planning 113 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions related to the
discount card type defined on this screen. However, this can be undone by unticking
the flag.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the commission type.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 114 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Management System General Coding

Use: In this screen, the user can determine the detailed data of codes used in concrete and
insurance sales invoices follow up.

How to Use Screen

First: Master Data
This section includes the main labels determined for each type of code that is used to
represent an activity or equipment related to concrete taking into consideration that these
labels are included in the system and the user does not interfere in their coding process.
However, when the user needs to enter the details related to a certain type, they can do so
by selecting this type, for example, Pumps and then entering the detailed data at the
bottom of the screen.
Second: Detailed Data
After determining clicking the Add button and selecting the code type that needs more
details in the master data, the user should follow the steps below.
- Sub Code: In this column, the user needs to enter the serial number of the type for
which the details will be recorded.
- Description: In this column, the user needs to enter the names of the types in the
default language defined on the system, such as names of pumps, cars, water
resistance, etc.

Enterprise Resource Planning 115 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Foreign Description: In this column, the user needs to enter the names of detailed
types in the foreign language defined on the system.
- Order: In this field, the user determines the order of the sub-code that is defined
manually, which helps organize how the sub-code will appear on the system screens.
- Remarks: In this column, the user enters any remarks at the sub-code level.
- Deactivate: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions related to the
selected type that is defined on this screen and automatically displays the date and
person responsible of deactivation.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the selected type.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 116 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Compensation Quantity Coding

Use: In this screen, the user can code the compensation quantities policies (bonus) based
on which the compensation quantities granted to customers will be calculated and fetched to
the compensation (free of charge) sales invoice in the sales system. This is most helpful for
the pharmaceutical sector that usually offers free quantities.
Remark: In this screen, the user can determine the maximum allowed
compensation quantity and in the Transactions Privileges screen, the
authorized user determines the highest additional percentage of
compensation quantities that each user cannot exceed.

How to Use Screen

First: Master Data
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the type of the compensation quantity.
- Type Name/ Foreign Name: In these fields, the user enters the name that will refer to
the compensation quantity in both the default language and the foreign language
defined on the system respectively.
- Policy Type by Item: In this field, the user determines the compensation quantities
policy (bonus) for the items that an organization sells to customers, by selecting one of
the following options:
 By Item: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Number, Item
Name, and Unit columns in the detailed data section where the user can determine
the compensation quantities for each item.

Enterprise Resource Planning 117 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 By Items Group: When this option is selected, the system displays the Group
Number and Group Name columns in the detailed data section where the user
can determine the compensation quantities for each group.
 By Item Type: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item Type
column in the detailed data section where the user can determine the
compensation quantities for each item type.
 By Item Activity: When this option is selected, the system displays the Item
Activity and Activity Name columns in the detailed data section where the user
can determine the compensation quantities for each item-related activity.
- Apply Policy: In this field, the user determines whether the compensation quantities
policy (bonus) will be standard across the whole organization or customized for each
center, activity, project, or warehouse by selecting one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, it means that the selected policy will not be
customized but rather standard.
 By Center: When this option is selected, the system displays the Center Number
and Center Name columns in the detailed data section where the user can
determine the compensation quantities for each cost center.
 By Activity: When this option is selected, the system displays the Activity
Number and Activity Name columns in the detailed data section where the user
can determine the compensation quantities for each activity.
 By Project: When this option is selected, the system displays the columns of
Project Number and Project Name in the detailed data section where the user
can determine the compensation quantities for each project.
 By Warehouse: When this option is selected, the system displays the columns
Warehouse Number and Warehouse Name in the detailed data section where the
user can determine the compensation quantities for each Warehouse.
 By Branch: When this option is selected, the system displays the columns of
Branch Number and Branch Name in the detailed data section where the user
can determine the compensation quantities for each branch.
- Policy Type by Sales: In this field, the user determines the compensation quantities
policy (bonus) that will be calculated for the volume of sales that an organization

Enterprise Resource Planning 118 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

makes to customers; whether based on sales quantity, amount or the invoice, by

selecting one of the following options:
 By Document: When this option is selected, the system displays the From
Quantity and To Quantity columns in the detailed data section where the user can
determine the compensation quantities that will be calculated for each invoice.
 On Net Sales Amount: When this option is selected, the system displays the
From Amount and To Amount columns in the detailed data section where the
user can determine the compensation quantities that will be calculated on the net
sales amount.
 On Net Sales Quantity: When this option is selected, the system displays the
From Quantity and To Quantity columns in the detailed data section where the
user can determine the compensation quantities per sold quantity which allows the
system to calculate the bonus on net sales quantities.
 On Net Sales Amount and Collection Percentage: When this option is selected,
the system displays the From Percentage, To Percentage From Amount and To
Amount columns in the detailed data section where the user can determine the net
sales amounts and collection percentages, based on which the compensation
quantities will be calculated.
- Policy Type: In this field, the user determines whether the compensation will be
calculated as Percentage or Value.
- Description: Here, the user enters a clear description of the compensation policy type.
- Do Not Include in Returns: This flag is activated for each compensation policy
independently to indicate that the policy requires not to include the compensation
quantities in the sales return.
- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions related to the
selected compensation policy.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the selected compensation policy.
- User: Here, the system automatically displays the user who has deactivated the
transactions related to the selected compensation policy.

Enterprise Resource Planning 119 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Second: Detailed Data

This part of the screen is closely related to the options selected in the master section. If no
option is selected in the master data section, no data will be rendered and based on the
options selected in the master data, the columns and fields in the detailed section change.
For example, this section may include the data of a specific option or
multiple options in the master section. It may render the data related to
the By Customer option in the Policy Type By Item field, the data
related to the By Warehouse option in the Policy By Financial Center
field, and the data related to the On Net Sales Amount option in Policy
Type by Sales field all together. Similarly, this applies to all other
options included in the master data fields.
- Detailed Data Entry: In general, all the detailed data that appear based on the options
determined in the master section are filled in through one of the following methods:
 Fetching from a list by pressing the F9 button.
 Manual Entry.
 Selection.
- Save: After completing data entry, users should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 120 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Contracts Types

Use: In this screen, the user can classify the sales contracts into different types that can be
used in the Sales Contracts screen to define newly added contracts. This helps the
organization generate reports per each contract type.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable serial
number for the contract type.
- Type Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the contract type in the system’s
default language.
- Foreign name: In this field, the user enters the name of the contract type in the
foreign language that is defined on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, users should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 121 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Contracts Terms Coding

Use: In this screen, the user can define the terms agreed on by both the organization and
the customer for the sales contracts so they can later fetch them easily to the Contract
Terms tab within the Sales Contracts screen when adding new contracts.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, and then follow the steps
as instructed below:
- Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a non-modifiable serial
number for the contract term.
- Default: This flag can be ticked for only one term code, and when ticked for certain
contract terms; they will be fetched automatically to the Sales Contracts screen.
- Description: In this field, the user can enter a description of the contract term code
that the user can then easily select in the Sales Contracts screen.
- Terms Data: In these fields, the user can enter more information on the contract
terms.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 122 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Chapter Two
System Inputs

Enterprise Resource Planning 123 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Introduction
Customer Management System Inputs are the basic data based on
which both the customer and sales management systems, as well as
the rest of the systems related to them, operate. This includes
Marketeers Data, Customers Groups, Collectors Data, Sales
Representatives Data, Drivers Data, Routes Data, Open Account
Request, Customers Data, Customers Opening Balances, Medical
Networks Data, Insurance Beneficiaries, Insurers Data, Member
Insurance Data screens.

Enterprise Resource Planning 124 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Marketeers Data
Use: In this screen, the user enters the data related to marketeers, such as the name,
address, as well as available contact data, and then link the marketeer to the relevant
customers and specific inventory items they use.

How to Use The Screen

To start working on this screen, users will need to click the Add button, and then follow
the steps illustrated below:
First: Marketeers Data
- Marketeer Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the marketeer’s
number and allows users to modify it.
- Marketeer Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the marketeer in the default
language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the marketeer in the foreign
language.
- Marketeer Type: In this field, the user determines the type of the marketeer from the
list of types that are coded in the Marketeer Types screen under Customer
Management System Configuration.
- Degree: In this field, the user determines the level of the marketeer from the list of
levels that have been coded in the Marketeer Levels Codes screen under the
Customer Management System Configuration. This helps to easily classify the
marketeers.

Enterprise Resource Planning 125 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Address: In this field, the user enters the marketeer’s address, including the city,
street, and district.
- Phone/ Post Office Box/ Fax/ Mobile Number: In these fields, the user enters the
phone number, post box office, fax number, and mobile number of the marketeer.
- Representative Number: In this field, the user enters the representative who
supervises the marketeer. If the user selects a representative that is linked to a
scientific representative, the Link Marketeers to Regions and Sample Issuance
Movement tabs appear on the screen and the Country, City, and Region fields
disappear as the user will enter their data will in the new tabs.
- Linked to Scientific Representative: This flag appears active when the user selects a
representative that is linked to a scientific representative in the Representative
Number field.
- Country, City, Region: In these fields, the user selects the country, city, and region of
the marketeer from the lists previously defined within the system configuration. These
data represent the geographical area where the marketeer works. However, it should
be noted that these fields do not appear if the marketeer is linked to a representative
that is linked to a scientific representative.
- Route: In this field, the user selects the route of the marketing representative, which is
defined in the Routes Data screen under customer management system inputs and
includes one region or more.
- Route Order: In this field, the user enters a number that indicates the route order for
each marketeer. This order determines how far the customer’s location is from the
marketeer. For example, if the customer location is 1, the user should enter here
number 1 as the route order. If the customer’s location is 2, the user should enter here
number 2 as the route order.
- Inactive: When the user ticks this flag, the system stops any transactions related to
the marketeer in the system.
- Remarks: In this field, the user writes any remarks related to the marketeer.
Second: Additional Data
In this tab, the user could enter any additional data that is related to the marketeer and not
included in other tabs noting that they can rename the fields as needed from the Texts

Enterprise Resource Planning 126 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Translation screen under General System Configuration. This way, the user can
generate various reports on an item.

Third: Link Marketeer to Customer

In this tab, the user could link the marketeer to customers, and thus generate reports on the
customers related to the marketeer.

- Customer Number/ Customer Name: In these columns, the user could determine the
name and number of the customer that will be linked to the marketeer. To do this, they
need to press the F9 button in one of the Customer Number fields to display a list
from which they can select the customer number and once done, the system
automatically displays the customer's name in the corresponding Customer Name
field.
- Cost Center/ Project/ Activity Number: These columns appear when the selected
option within the Cost Center Type, Project Type, or Activity Type parameters in the
Customer Management System Parameters screen is Single or Multiple. Here, the
user could determine the sub-accounts related to each of the customers that are linked
to the marketeer.
Fourth: Link Marketeer to Item
In this tab, the user could link the marketeer to the inventory items that they handle if any,
and thus generate reports on each marketeer and item.

Enterprise Resource Planning 127 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Item Number/ Item Name: In these columns, the user could determine the name and
number of the item that will be linked to the marketeer. To do this, they need to press
the F9 button in one of the Item Number fields to display a list from which they can
select the required item number, and once done, the system will automatically display
the item name in the corresponding Item Name field.
Fifth: Link Marketeers to Regions
This tab appears if the marketeer is linked to a representative that is linked to a scientific
representative. Here, the user could link the marketeer to the geographical areas where the
marketeer works noting that these regions are previously defined with the Regions Data
screen under the System Configuration.

- Region Number/ Region Name: In these columns, the user could determine the name
and number of the region that will be linked to the marketeer. To do this, they need to
press the F9 button in one of the Region Number fields to display a list from which
they can select the required region number and once done, the system will
automatically display the name of the region in the corresponding Region Name field.
- Marketing Percentage: In this column, the user selects the marketing percentage for
all the regions that lie within the range of the marketeer service area from the list of
percentages that are previously coded in the General Coding screen within the
Customers Management System (marketing percentage in regions).
Sixth: Sample Issuance Movement
This tab appears if the marketeer is linked to a representative who is linked to a scientific
representative. It displays the movement that is made to issue samples to the marketeer
based on the goods out order linked to the representative.

- Save: After completing the data entry, users should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 128 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Groups
Use: With the help of this screen, the user could divide the customers into groups, such as
wholesale customers, retail customers, food and beverage customers, white goods
customers, etc. according to the organization’s needs. This way the user will be able to link
the account at the group level when the selected option in the Link to General Ledger
parameter is Accounts Group. However, if the selected option in the Link to General
Ledger parameter is Multiple Accounts, the user will have to link the account at the
customer level within the Customers Data screen.
Remark: Users are granted the privilege to handle customer groups
individually within the Inputs Privileges screen.

How To Use the screen

To start working on this screen, users will need to click the Add button, and then follow the
steps illustrated below:
First: Master Data
- Group Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the group number and
allows users to modify it.
Hint: The user could display a list of the customers who are linked to the
group by clicking on the Arrow next to the group number.
- Group Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the group in the system’s
default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the group in the system’s
foreign language.

Enterprise Resource Planning 129 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Group Account Number: This field appears when the selected option in the Link to
General Ledger parameter within the Customers Management System Parameters
screen is Accounts Groups. Here, the user needs to press the F9 button to select the
number of the customers' group account that is defined in the chart of accounts. This
is the account that is affected by any transaction related to the customers linked to the
group.
If the selected option in the Link to General Ledger parameter within the Customers
Management System Parameters screen is Multi Accounts, the Group Account
Number field will not appear on this screen and the user will need to link the group
account within the Customers Data screen.
- Save: After completing the data entry, users should press save.
Hint: Users can display the total of the sales invoices and sales returns at
the group level by clicking the Activity Level button at the top of the
screen, which opens a table displaying the total sales (invoice - discount)
as well as total returns.
Second: Accounts
In this tab, the user could link the accounts including the Advance Payment, Real Estate
Insurance, Sales Receipt Intermediary Account, etc. to the group. Afterward, these accounts
appear automatically in the Accounts tab of the Customer Data screen; noting that the
user can modify them as needed.

Third: Statistical Data

This tab displays all transactions performed on the customer group that is selected within
the Master Data section, taking into consideration that the system displays the statistical
data when the user views the group data.

Enterprise Resource Planning 130 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Enterprise Resource Planning 131 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Collectors Data
Use: In this screen, the user could enter the data of the collectors, including names,
addresses, as well as contact details, and then determine the account that will be affected
by the commission a collector receives while indicating the percentage of this commission.
Here, users could also link the collectors to the number of cash that they use when
providing money.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users will need to click the Add button, and then follow the
steps illustrated below:
First: Collectors' Data
- Collector Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the collector
number, yet allows the user to modify it.
- Collector Name: In this field, the user needs to enter the name of the collector in the
system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user needs to enter the name of the collector in the
system’s foreign language.
- Account Number: In this field, the user determines the account number that will be
affected by the collector's commission and transactions when issuing a sales invoice.
- Collector Type: In this field, the user selects the collector type from the list of types
that are previously defined within the Collectors Types screen under the Customer
Management System Configuration.

Enterprise Resource Planning 132 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Region/ City: In the Region field, the user determines the number of regions that
represents the geographical scope within which the collector works. Once done, the
system automatically displays the city to which the region belongs in the City field.
- Commission Percentage: In this field, the user determines the percentage of
commission that the collector will receive.
- Inactive: If this flag is ticked, the system suspends any transaction that is related to
the collector and automatically displays the suspension date, taking into consideration
that the user should enter the suspension reason in the concerned field. If the user
wants to undo this action, they can do so by unticking this flag.
- Phone/ Mobile Number/ Address/ E-mail: In these fields, the user enters the phone
number, e-mail, mobile number, and address of the collector.
- Remarks: In this field, the user enters any remarks related to the collector.
- Cash Number: In this field, the user links the collector to one of the cashes, if needed,
to facilitate the selection of collectors in vouchers.
Second: Privileges
This tab determines which users are granted the privilege to handle collectors, whether to
perform transactions or display related reports noting that these privileges could be specified
within the Inputs Privileges screen in the System Management

- Modify: Once the collector is added, the privileges of the user could be modified to
Add, View, or both using this button.
Third: Statistics
This tab displays automatically any statistical data on the transactions related to the
collector, whether cash collection or check collection transactions.

Enterprise Resource Planning 133 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Representatives Data

Use: With the help of this screen, the user can achieve the following:
- Enter the data of the sales representatives, such as name, address, and available
contact details.
- Link the representative to the (cash, bank, cost center, activity number, or warehouse)
noting that some of these fields are mandatorily linked based on the selected option in
both the Link Representatives to Items Activities, and Link Representative to
Warehouse, Cash and Center parameters within the Customers Management
System Parameters screen.
- Enter the data of the representatives' guarantees, distribution system, and
representatives’ commissions.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users will need to click the Add button, and then follow the
steps illustrated below:
First: Master Data
- Sales Representative Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the
representative number; yet it allows users to modify it.
- Main Sales Representative Number: In this field, the user selects the number of the
main sales representative if any, from the list that appears when pressing the F9
button and which includes the sales representatives previously defined within the
Sales Representatives Data screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 134 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Account Number/ Representative Name: In the Account Number field, the user
selects the number of the representative’s account from the list that appears when
pressing the F9 button. Once done, the system displays both the account number and
the representative’s name, noting that the Account Number becomes a mandatory
field when the Post Reps. Commission upon issuing Sales Invoice parameter is
activated within the Customers Management System Parameters screen.
- Representative Type: In this field, the user selects the type of representative from the
list of types previously defined within the Representative Types screen. This way,
users will be able to generate multiple system reports, such as sales reports, based on
the representative type.
- Linked to Scientific Representative: This flag is generally used by pharmaceutical
companies to clarify that the representative is a scientific representative, and when
activated, the following applies:
 The system displays multiple tabs including Link Representatives to Items, Link
Representatives to Regions, and Samples Issuance Movement.
 Fields like Country, City, and Region fields are hidden from the screen.
 No selling process is allowed, and only the free sample items in the goods out
order are handled.
- Address/ Phone/ Fax/ Mobile/ Post Office Box Number: In these fields, the user
manually enters the representative’s address, phone numbers, fax, mobile, and post
office box number respectively.
- Country/ City/ Region: In these fields, the user determines the geographical area
where the sales representative work.
- Commission Percentage: In this field, the user determines the percentage of the
commission that a representative will receive. This percentage is automatically
deducted from both the sales invoice and receipt voucher once the sales representative
is determined and linked to them.
- Route: In this field, the user determines the representative’s route from the list of
routes that have been previously coded in the Routes Data screen, which appears
when pressing the F9 button.
- Route Order: In this field, the user manually determines the order of the
representative’s route.

Enterprise Resource Planning 135 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Last Sale Date: In this field, the system displays the date of the last sales invoice
linked to the representative.
- Warehouse Number/ Cash Number/ Center Number/ Activity Number/ Project
Number: Linking a representative to the data entered in these fields could be optional
or mandatory depending on the selected options in the Customers Management
System Parameters screen. If it is mandatory, the system will allow the user to only
use the cash, warehouse, center, project, or activity that has been linked to the
representative. For example, when issuing a cash invoice that has a specified cash
number, the system automatically fetches the number of the representative that is
linked to this particular cash.
- Intermediary Bank: In this field, the user selects the intermediary bank to which the
representative will be linked from the list of banks that are defined in the Banks
screen. Once the representative is linked to the bank determined in this screen, all
banking transactions related to the representative are recorded in this bank account.
- Credit Limit in Local Currency: With the help of this field, the user could determine a
certain credit limit for the representative. This is the maximum sales amount that the
sales representative cannot exceed when selling on credit and in this case, the system
prevents any selling process that exceeds the amount determined in this field.
- Sales Plan Number: In this field, the user determines the number of the sales plan
that will be linked to the representative from the list that appears when pressing the F9
button.
- Employee Number: With the help of this field, the user can link the representative to a
certain employee number so that they can pay any due commissions to the
representative with the salary of this particular employee in the Payroll System, noting
that the commissions are calculated within the Calculate Representatives
Commissions screen and then fetched to the Assign and Modify Variable Pay
screen.
- Deactivate: When the user ticks this flag, the system stops any transactions related to
the representative. However, the user still can undo this action by unticking the same
flag.
- Remarks: In this field, the user enters any remarks related to the representative.

Enterprise Resource Planning 136 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Second: Guarantees Details

In this tab, the user enters the data of guarantees related to the representative as follows:
- Guarantee Status: If the selected option in this field is Active, this means that the
guarantee is still valid. If the selected option is Inactive, this means that the guarantee
has expired.
- Guarantee Type: In this field, the user could select the guarantee type from the
provided list. It could be a legal, commercial, banking, or real estate guarantee.
- Guarantee Start Date/ End Date: In these fields. the user determines the guarantee’s
start and end dates.
- Guarantor Name/ Address: In these fields, the user respectively enters the name and
address of the guarantor.
- Guarantor Activity Nature\ Financial Position: In these fields, the user determines
the nature of the guarantors’ activities whether Commercial Industrial, or Service,
and their financial position respectively.
- Other Data: This includes the Guarantee Value, Guarantee Registration Date,
Registration Number in Court, Registration Number at Chamber of Commerce,
Guarantor Commercial Register Number, Guarantor Phone Number, Guarantor
Fax Number, etc.
Third: Distribution System

Enterprise Resource Planning 137 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

This tab is used with the Distribution System as follows:

- Tax Calculation Method: In this field, the user determines how the tax will be
calculated by selecting one of the methods defined in the Tax Calculation Methods
screen under the system’s general configuration. Afterward, the system displays the
selected method as the default calculation method on the sales invoice; yet it allows
the user to modify it.
- Distribution Group: In this field, the user selects the distribution group that is defined
within the distribution system and to which the representative belongs. This way, only
the items of the distribution group to which the representative is linked will appear in
the mobile distribution application.
- Checks Posting Method: With the help of this parameter, the user could determine
how the representative will receive the checks from the customer and how the related
financial effects will be rendered within the distribution application using one of the
provided options; whether Voucher Date, Due Date, Mediate Notes Receivable –
Auto Post or Enter Accruals Manually.
- Distance from Customer To Open Visit (In Meters): In this field, the user determines
in meters the maximum distance between the representative and the client that the
application will automatically detect to allow the registration of the representative visit.
- Region Range (In Meters): In this field, the user determines the range of the region
where the customer is located in meters.
- Maximum Route Exceeding Limit: In this field, the user determines the maximum
number of times a representative can exceed his daily route limit. Thus, when the
representative exceeds this limit, the system declines any attempts to open new visits
and displays an alert message stating that the max limit for the route has been
exceeded, and then, entering the route order within the Representative Daily Route
screen becomes mandatory.
- Maximum Number of Customers in Plan: In this field, the user determines the
maximum number of customers that can be included in the representative plan.
- Cash Cumulative Limit in Local Currency: In this field, the user determines the
cumulative cash limit for all currencies in the local currency to ensure that the cash a
representative hold does not exceed a certain limit or cause any risks.

Enterprise Resource Planning 138 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Cash Daily Limit in Local Currency: In this field, the user determines the daily cash
limit in local currency. This limit is the maximum cash balance a representative can
have.
- Open Visit Using: In this field, the user determines how the representative’s visit to
the target customer will be registered on the application using one of the following
options:
 Manual: This option means that the representative can open a visit on the
application manually when they arrive at the customer’s place.
 Customer Barcode: This option means that the representative can open a visit on
the application by scanning the customer's barcode when they arrive at their place.
 By Map for Region Range: This option means that the representative can open a
visit on the application when they are within the range of the customer’s
geographical region, which is pre-defined in the Distance from Customers To
Open Visit (in Meters) field.
 By Customer Location GPS: This option means that the representative can open
a visit on the application using the GPS when they arrive at the customer’s place.
 GPS Location or Barcode or Manually: This option means that the representative
can open the visit on the system when they arrive at the customer’s place using
the GPS when the internet connection is available, by scanning the customer’s
barcode if any, or manually.
- App Last Update: In this field, the system displays the date of the last Onyx ERP
system's mobile distribution application data update.
- Last Posting from Application Date: In this field, the system displays the date of the
last data transfer from the mobile distribution application to the Onyx ERP system.
- Work Beyond Plan: Activating this flag allows the representative to work without
following the options included in the distribution plan noting that this depends on
whether the representative is given the privilege to Work Outside the Plan or Work
Within The Plan.
- Allow Documents Cancelation: By ticking this flag, the representative will be able to
cancel any document.

Enterprise Resource Planning 139 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Allow Customer Location Modification: Ticking this flag allows the user to change
the location of the customer to the new one when needed.
- Include All items in Returns: Ticking this flag allows the representative to include any
of the items within the sales return invoice, in case no invoice number is determined,
including the items that do not exist in the representative’s warehouse. This is
particularly useful when the return process is carried out by a different representative
than that who performed the selling process.
- Selling Is Not Allowed: Ticking this flag allows the representative to register his visit
to the customer without allowing the system to carry out any selling transaction, and
causes the Warehouse Number field on the representative Main Data tab to
disappear.
- Collection Is Not Allowed: Ticking this flag allows the representative to register his
visit to the customer without allowing the system to collect any money, and causes the
Intermediary Bank field on the representative Main Data tab to disappear.
- Allow File Sharing in Application: Ticking this flag allows the representative to share
files such as customer account statements in the mobile distribution application.
- Sales Return Is Not Allowed: Ticking this flag bans the representative from carrying
out any sales returns using the mobile distribution application.
- Daily Closure of Representative Movement and Data Update: When this flag is
ticked, the representative will need to update the data daily from the Onyx Pro ERP to
the mobile application and vice versa, noting that they will not be able to use the
mobile application until the update is completed.
- Allow Customer Request Creation from Warehouses Linked to Representative
Branch: This flag appears when Allow Customer Request Creation from
Warehouses Linked to Representative Branch parameter is activated within the
Distribution Parameters screen, and when ticked, it allows the representative to add
customer requests from any warehouse provided that this warehouse is linked to a
branch that is linked to the representative.
- Use Representatives Returns Warehouse: This flag appears when the Use
Representatives Returns Warehouse parameter is activated within the Distribution
Parameters screen, and when ticked, the system displays the Return Warehouse field

Enterprise Resource Planning 140 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

where the user could determine the warehouse that will receive any returns, noting that
this step needs to be applied for every representative individually. This can be
particularly useful to distinguish between quantities returned and quantities available in
the representative’s warehouse.
Hint: It is not possible to link one return warehouse to multiple
representatives. In other words, the user will need to determine a
unique return warehouse for every representative, if needed.
- Print Using Ultimate Application: Ticking this flag allows the system to make printing
via the distribution mobile application mandatory.
- Allow Issue/ Transfer Requests Entry: Ticking this flag allows the representative to
issue goods-out requests for free-of-charge quantities without issuing a sales invoice.
Fourth: Privileges
This tab helps determine the users who will have the privileges that are related to
representatives, whether to carry out transactions or generate reports noting that these
privileges can be determined within the Input Privileges screen under the System
Management.

- Modify: Using this button, an organization can add the representative, and then
determine whether the user will have the privilege to Add, View, or both by ticking the
checkboxes next to each user.
- Save: After completing data entry, users should press save.
Fifth: Link Representatives to Items Activities
This tab appears if the Link Representatives to Items Activities parameter is activated
within the Customer Management System Parameters screen. Here, the user can link a
representative to the items-related activities that are pre-defined in the Item Activities

Enterprise Resource Planning 141 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

screen and which are also linked to specific items within the Items Data screen. And thus,
the system will allow users to include only the items associated with the activities to which a
representative is linked in the sales invoice.

Sixth: Transactions
Using this tab, the user can display the transactions that are related to a sales
representative per currency. They can also view cash and credit sales invoices, as well as
return invoices that are associated with the representative.

Seventh: Link Representatives to Items

This tab appears when the Linked To Scientific Representative flag is ticked. Here, users
can link the representative to the items that will be used noting that the items that a
scientific representative can handle are only the items defined as Free Samples within the
Items Data screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 142 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Eighth: Link Representatives to Regions

This tab appears when the Linked To Scientific Representative flag is ticked. Here, the
user can link the scientific representative to the regions that lie within their work
geographical scope. They can also determine the marketeer that will handle each region,
and once done, the system will display the marketing percentage determined for each
marketeer within the Marketeers Data screen.

Ninth: Sample Issuance Movement

This tab appears when the Linked To Scientific Representative flag is ticked. Here, the
user can display the movements made to issue samples to the representative based on
their associated goods out orders noting that the Linked To Scientific Representative flag
appears when the Use Scientific Representative System parameter is activated within the
Customers Management System Parameters screen.

- Close: Users tick this flag to implement annual closing and transfer warehouse
balances. However, no stock is transferred until this flag is ticked for each
representative. This way no stock will be transferred while there still exist transactions
that have not been transferred from the mobile distribution application to the Onyx ERP
system. Therefore, the user responsible for closing and transferring the stock needs to
contact the representative to confirm that all necessary data are posted.

Enterprise Resource Planning 143 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Enterprise Resource Planning 144 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Drivers Data
Use: In this screen, the user could enter the data of the drivers, including their phone
numbers, mobile numbers, e-mails, addresses, associated representative, etc., link them to
the cities and regions they work in and then determine and order their specific routes.
Afterward, all this data can be later used in the Distribution and Trailers Management
Systems.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
Master Data
- Driver Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the driver's number; yet
allows the user to modify it.
- Driver Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the driver in the system’s
default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the driver in the foreign
language selected on the system.
First: Main Data
- Region Number/ City: In these fields, the user selects the region in which the driver
works from the provided list, and once done, the system automatically displays the city
to which this particular region belongs.

Enterprise Resource Planning 145 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Route: In this field, the user selects the route of the driver from the list of routes that
are pre-defined in the Routes screen within the customers' management system
inputs.
- Route Order: In this field, the user will need to determine the order of the driver’s
route sequentially if the route is taken by multiple drivers.
- Inactive: When ticked, this flag indicates that the system has temporarily deactivated
any transactions related to the driver in the Transactions screen, taking into
consideration that the user should enter the reason for deactivation, and then, the
system will automatically display the date, and time of deactivation. If needed, the user
can reactivate the same driver again by unticking this flag.
- Representative Number: In this field, the user selects the representative that is
associated with the driver.
- Phone/ Fax/ Mobile Number/ E-mail/ Address: In these fields, the user needs to
enter the driver's data including their phone, mobile number, fax number, e-mail, and
address.
- Vehicle Number/ Owner Name/ Vehicle Curb Weight: In these fields, the user enters
the data of the vehicle in a driver’s custody including the vehicle number, the name of
the vehicle owner, and the vehicle’s curb weight.
- Remarks: In this field, the user writes any other remarks related to the driver.
- User Number: In this field, the user selects the user that is associated with the driver
from the list.
Second: Identities
In this tab, the user needs to provide the proofs of identity for every driver, such as ID card,
driver's license…etc. noting that they can scan these documents and display them on the
screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 146 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Third: Privileges
This tab determines which users are granted the privilege to handle drivers, whether to
perform transactions or display related reports noting that these privileges could be specified
within the Inputs Privileges screen in the System Management.

- Save: After completing the data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 147 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Routes Data
Use: In this screen, the user can define the routes that an organization's activity covers and
which may include one or multiple regions within one city. These are the routes taken by
marketeers, sales representatives, collectors, drivers, and customers, and through which the
user can easily follow up on the sales and the collection movements.

How To Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Route Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the route number and
allows the user to modify it.
- Arabic Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the route in the Arabic
language selected within the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the route in the foreign
language that is selected within the system.
- Country/ Governorate Number/ City: In these fields, the user selects the country,
governorate, and city that lies within the range of the selected route from the drop-
down lists that include the data previously defined in the Countries, Governorates,
and Cities Data screens under the System Configuration.
- Region Number: In this column, the user needs to select the region(s) that every
route will cover based on the city that is determined within the above-mentioned City
field.
- Save: After completing the data entry, users should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 148 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Open Account Request

Use: With the help of this screen, users who don’t have the privilege to create new
customer accounts, can submit a request to the authorized user to add a new customer
account within the Customers Data screen. Afterward, the authorized user creates a new
customer account and generates its serial number based on the option that is selected in
the Customers Sequence Type field within the Customers Management System
Parameters screen; whether General, By Group, or By Group and Type.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
First: Master Data
- Group: In this field, the user determines the customer group to which the customer will
be linked.
- Customers Types: In this field, the user determines the type of customer from the
provided list.
- Customer Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a new serial
number for the customer based on the last existing sequence. For example, to create
the number of the customer group to which the customer will be linked and if the
selected option in the Customers Sequence Type field is By Group or By Group
and Type, the system generates a new serial number that follows the sequence of the
last customers group or the last group and type. Meanwhile, if the selected type of
sequence is Cumulative, the system will use a cumulative sequence for all customers.

Enterprise Resource Planning 149 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Account Number: This field depends on the selected option in the Link to General
Ledger parameter. If the selected option is Customers Group, the system will
automatically display the account number once the customer's group is determined.
And, if the selected option is Multiple, the user will need to manually determine the
account number of the customer.
- Main Customer Number: In this field, the user needs to determine the main customer
if any.
- Customer Name: In this field, the user needs to enter the name of the customer in the
default language that is selected within the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user needs to enter the name of the customer in the
foreign language that is selected within the system.
Second: Main Data
This tab includes the following:
- Degree Number: Here, the user needs to select the customer's degree from the
provided list.
- Branch Number: In this field, the user determines the branch that the customer deals
with from the list.
- Country/ City/ Governorate Number/ Region Number: In these fields, the user
needs to select the country, city, governorate, and region from the provided lists
respectively.
- Representative Number: In this field, the user determines the sales representative
that will be linked to the customer, and thus, this representative will appear
automatically in the customer's sales invoice.
- Collector Number: In this field, the user determines the collector that will be linked to
the customer.
- Cost Center: In this field, the user determines the cost center that is associated with
the customer, if necessary.
- Credit Period: In this field, the user determines -in days- the credit period during
which the customer needs to pay their debts, noting that this credit period varies from
one customer to another based on the organization’s policy.
- Representative Person: Ticking this flag indicates that the customer is also a
representative person; but this does not affect the rest of the screens yet it is
particularly useful for generating related reports.

Enterprise Resource Planning 150 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Route: In this field, the user determines the customer's route from the provided list of
pre-defined routes.
- Route Order: In this field, the user needs to determine the order of the route where
the customer is located.
- Linked to Vendor Number: In this field, the user needs to determine a specific
number for the vendor account that will be linked to the customer - if the same person
has both a vendor and a customer account at the same time- taking into consideration
that the user can generate a combined statement for the two accounts.
- Driver Number: In this field, the user selects the number of the driver that is linked to
the customer if any, from the provided list.
- Insurer: This flag appears when the Use Medical Insurance System parameter is
activated within the Customer Management System Parameters screen, and once
ticked, it allows the system to create next to it a new field where the user can select
the customer’s healthcare provider.
- Linked to Real Estate System: When this flag is ticked, the system displays the
customer in the real estate system.
- Currency: The user needs to tick the checkbox next to the currency that a customer
has chosen.
- Credit Limit: Here, the user determines the credit limit that the organization has
estimated for the customer based on the selected currency.
- Invoice Credit Limit: In this column, the user determines the credit limit that each
customer invoice should not exceed based on the selected currency.
- Exceed Credit Limit: With the help of this field, the user can determine whether or not
the credit limit can be exceeded using one of the following options:
 Not Allowed: When this option is selected, the system prevents the user from
exceeding the credit limit that is determined for the customer.
 Allowed: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to exceed the
credit limit that is determined for the customer.
 Allowed with Alert: When this option is selected, the system allows the user to
exceed the credit limit and displays an alert message.

Enterprise Resource Planning 151 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Credit Limit Exceed Percentage: If the selected option in the Exceed Credit Limit
field is Allowed or Allowed with Alert, the system allows the user to determine in this
field the percentage based on which the credit limit can be exceeded.
- Pricing Levels: In this field, the user determines the pricing level that will be linked to
the customer by selecting one of the provided options; whether wholesale price, retail
price, or default.
- Deactivate: This flag can be used to stop using the currency for a specific customer.
Third: Other Data
All the data in this tab are optional and can be entered as needed by the organization as
follows:

- Address: In this field, the user needs to enter the address of the customer.
- PO Box / Phone/ Mobile Number / Fax Number/ Zip Code/ E-Mail/ Website/
Contact Person: In these fields, the user needs to enter the data manually.
- Maximum Discount %: In this field, the user determines the maximum discount
percentage that can be given to the customer.
- Grace Period After Due Date: Here, the user determines the grace period (in days)
during which the customer is allowed to delay the due payment without penalties.
- Password: In this field, the user determines the customer's password that will appear
in the Password field within the Customers Data screen.
- License Number: In this field, the user needs to enter the license number of the
customer.
- License Owner: In this field, the user determines the name of the license owner.
- Person In Charge: In this field, the user determines the name of the person in charge.
- Person Authorized to Sign: In this field, the user determines the name of the person
that is authorized to sign the documents of the transactions carried out between the
customer and the facility.

Enterprise Resource Planning 152 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Sequence: This field is a digital counter that indicates the number of customers for
which new accounts are opened on this screen.
Fourth: Additional Data
This tab includes a group of optional fields that are related to the customer’s activity, such
as the commercial register number, tax number (TIN), capital owned…etc., and which are
displayed for information purposes only.

Fifth: Additional Fields

This tab allows the user to create new fields that they may use to display additional data or
information about the customer or include it in reports. Whenever the user needs to rename
those additional fields, they can do so using the Texts Translation screen under the
General System Configuration where the Customer Data screen appears, and the user
can rename the fields using the modify button.

Sixth: Guarantees Data

- Guarantee Status: If the selected option here is Active, this indicates that the
guarantee is still valid, and if the selected option is Inactive, this indicates that the
guarantee is expired.

Enterprise Resource Planning 153 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Guarantee Type: In this field, the user selects the type of guarantee that is related to
the customer; whether Legal, Commercial, Banking, or Real Estate.
- Guarantee Start Date and End Date: In these fields, the user needs to enter the start
and end dates of the customer's guarantee.
- Guarantor's Name and Address: In these fields, the user records the name and
address of the guarantor.
- Guarantor Activity Nature\ Financial Position: In these fields, the user needs to
enter the nature of the guarantor's activity; whether commercial, industrial, or service,
and their financial position respectively.
- Other Data: These data include Guarantee Value, Guarantee Registration Date,
Registration Number in Court, Registration Number at Chamber of Commerce,
Guarantor Commercial Register Number, Guarantor Phone Number, Guarantor
Fax Number…etc. and they are entered manually.
- Save: After completing data entry users should press save.
- Approval: The authorized user could approve the open account request by clicking
the Approve button in the toolbar. This allows the system to display a screen where
the user can select one of the following procedures: Approve, Reject, or Return, and
then save data. If the request is approved, it will be available and ready to be fetched
to the Customer Data screen by pressing the F5 button in the Customer Number
field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 154 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Data
Use: In this screen, the user enters customer-related master and detailed data such as
name, address, customer branch, granted limits (credit limit and invoice limit), customer
pricing level, contact information, country, governorate, region, representative, assigned
collector, personal data, ID, activity data, guarantees, statistics, etc.

Screen Use Method

First: Master Data
To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Group: In this field, the user selects the group to which the customer belongs.
- Customer Types: In this field, the user selects the type of customer from the provided
list.
- Customer Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a new serial
number for the customer based on the last existing sequence. For example, to create
the number of the customer group to which the customer will be linked and if the
selected option in the Customers Sequence Type field is By Group or By Group
and Type, the system generates a new serial number that follows the sequence of the
last customers group or the last group and type. Meanwhile, if the selected type of
sequence is Cumulative, the system will use a cumulative sequence for all customers.
- Fetch Customer Number from Open Account Request Screen: When the user
moves the cursor to the Customer Number field and presses the F5 button, the
system displays a screen where the user could determine the customer for whom a

Enterprise Resource Planning 155 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

new serial number has been created within the Open Account Request screen so that
it could be fetched to this screen. However, it should be noted that the user can
change the customer account number that is fetched from Open Account Request
screen.
Hint: If the Modify Customer Number Upon Addition to Customers
Data privilege is not activated for the user within the Customers
System tab in the Transactions Privileges screen, they will not be
able to fetch the open account request.
- Account Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the number of the
group account that is determined in the Chart of Accounts and where the financial
effects of any transactions recorded in the customer’s account are rendered if the
selected option in the Link to General Ledger parameter is Accounts Group. If the
selected option in the Link to General Ledger parameter is Multi Accounts, the
Account Number field will not appear and the customer group account will not be
used.
- Main Customer Number: In this field, the user determines the main customer if any.
- Customer Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the customer in the
system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the customer in the system’s
foreign language.
- User Number: This field should include the user number that a customer will use to
log in to the system via the customer requests application.
- Password: This field should include the password that a customer will use to log in to
the restaurant's system or the customer system application.
- Classification: In this field, the user selects the appropriate customer classification
from the provided list of classifications that have been previously defined within the
Customers Classification screen.
Second: Main Data
This tab includes the following:
- Degree Number: In this field, the user needs to select the customer's degree from the
provided list, noting that these customer degrees are the ones that the user has been

Enterprise Resource Planning 156 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

granted the privilege to use within the Inputs Privileges screen. Thus, when
evaluating customers, the system will automatically display the customer’s degree after
evaluating customers and updating their data within the Evaluation screen.
- Branch Number: In this field, the user selects the branch to which the customer
belongs from the provided list. This way, the system will allow only customer-related
transactions that are carried out on this particular branch.
- Representative Number: This field appears when the Link Customer to Multiple
Representatives parameter is not activated. Here, the user can determine the sales
representative who is linked to the customer and appears automatically in the customer
sales invoice. If the Link Customer to Multiple Representatives parameter is
activated, the system will hide this field and show the Link Customers to
Representatives tab within the Customers Data screen, where the user will be able
to link the customer to multiple representatives.
- Collector Number: This field appears when the Link Customer To Multiple
Collectors parameter is not activated. Here, the user can determine the collector who
is linked to the customer and appears automatically in the customer sales invoice. If
the Link Customer To Multiple Collectors parameter is activated, the system will
hide this field and show the Link Customers To Collectors tab within the Customers
Data screen, where the user will be able to link the customer to multiple collectors.
- Cost Center: In this field, the user determines the cost center that is linked to the
customer if necessary and which appears by default in the customer-related transactions
noting that the user can change this particular cost center in the rest of the system screens.
- Project Number: This field appears when the selected option in the Projects Data
parameter within the General Parameters screen is Mandatory and when the project
type is determined within the Customers Management System Parameters screen.
Here, the user determines the number of the project that is linked to the customer.
- Credit Period: In this field, the user determines -in days- the credit period during
which the customer needs to pay their debts, noting that this credit period varies from
one customer to another based on the organization’s policy and the customer’s
credibility degree.

Enterprise Resource Planning 157 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Representative Person: Ticking this flag indicates that the customer is also a
representative person; but this does not affect the rest of the screens yet it is
particularly useful for generating related reports.
- Route: In this field, the user determines the customer's location route from the
provided list of pre-defined routes.
- Route Order: In this field, the user needs to determine the order of the route where
the customer is located.
- Linked to Vendor Number: In this field, the user selects a specific number for the
vendor account that will be linked to the customer from the list that appears when
pressing the F9 button - if the same person has both a vendor and a customer
account at the same time- taking into consideration that the user can generate a
combined statement for the two accounts, customer data reports and monthly balance
reports (within the Customers Monthly Balances Reports screen under the
Information Management System), that include only the customers that are linked to
certain vendors.
- Driver Number: In this field, the user selects the number of the driver that is linked to
the customer if any from the provided list.
- Marketeer Number: In this field, the customer is linked to the promotor, if necessary,
by selecting the promotor from the list.
- Employee Number: In this field, the user determines the number of the employee that
will be linked to the customer, if needed, and which will appear automatically when the
customer is selected in the sales invoice. This is particularly useful to calculate the
employees’ achieved sales before calculating the percentage of commission on the
sales.
- Insurer: Ticking this flag indicates that the customer has medical insurance coverage
and allows the system to create next to it a new field where the user can select the
customer’s healthcare provider.
- Agent: Ticking this flag indicates that the customer is an exchange agent and will
appear within the Money Transfers and Exchange system.
- Linked to Real Estate System: When this flag is ticked, the system displays the
customer in the real estate system.

Enterprise Resource Planning 158 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Modify Customer Fixed Price: This flag appears when the Fix Pricing Level for
Customer in Sales parameter is activated within the Customers Management
System Parameters screen. It is activated for each customer individually and thus; the
system allows the user to change the fixed price that is determined for the customer
when entering the sales invoice.
- Currency: The user needs to tick the checkbox next to the currency that a customer
has chosen.
- Pricing Level for Credit Sales: In this field, the user needs to include the pricing level
that will be used when selling to the customer on credit.
- Pricing Level for Cash Sales: In this field, the user needs to include the pricing level
that will be used when selling to the customer in cash.
Hint: If the Fix Sales Pricing Level for Customer parameter is
activated, then the pricing level that is determined for the customer
cannot be changed. However, if in any case the user wants to make an
exception for a certain customer, they can do so by activating the
Modify Customer Fixed Price parameter on this screen.
- Default Currency: With the help of this flag, the user can determine the default
currency that will be used with the customer and which the system will then
automatically include in related transactions. However, it should be noted that this flag
is ticked for each currency individually and the user can change the selected currency
as needed.
- Deactivate: Ticking this flag directs the system to stop any customer-related
transactions that use the selected currency. But, whenever the user wishes to resume
the customer-related transactions that use the selected currency, they can do so by
unticking this flag.
- Deactivate Sales: Ticking this flag directs the system to stop any selling process that
is carried out using the selected currency. But, whenever the user wishes to continue
selling to the customer using the selected currency, they can do so by unticking this
flag.

Enterprise Resource Planning 159 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Third: Other Data

This tab includes the data that the user optionally enters according to the organization’s
requirements:

- Address: In this field, the user enters the customer address in detail.
- (PO Box/ Phone/ ZiP Code/ Mobile/ Fax Number/ E-Mail/ Website/ Contact
Person: The user needs to manually enter the data of all of these fields.
- WhatsApp Mobile Number: In this field, the user enters the customer’s WhatsApp
number which will receive SMS notifications.
- Maximum Discount Percentage: In this field, the user determines the maximum
discount percentage a customer can have.
- Default Discount Percentage: In this field, the user determines the default discount
percentage a customer can have.
- Account Opening Date: In this field, the user determines the date on which the
customer account is opened to help identify the start date of related transactions.
- GPS: In this field, the user enters the coordinates of the customer's location.
- Last Match Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the reconciliation date
that has been determined in the Statement Reconciliation screen within the Auditing
and Posting Management System after customer reconciliation.
- Remarks: The user enters any remarks about the customer in this field.
- Deactivate Customer: Ticking this flag directs the system to stop any transactions
carried out with the selected customer. But, whenever the user wishes to resume the
transactions that are carried out with this customer, they can do so by unticking this
flag.

Enterprise Resource Planning 160 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Deactivate Sales: Ticking this flag directs the system to stop any selling process that
is carried out with the customer. But, whenever the user wishes to continue selling to
the customer, they can do so by unticking this flag.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the user enters the deactivation date.
- Deactivation Reason: Here, the user enters the deactivation reason.
- Accruals Type: This field appears when the Use Customers Claim parameter is
activated within the Customers Management System Parameters screen. It includes
the following options:
 By Invoice: Selecting this option indicates that the installment of the customer's
invoices payment will be at the invoice level.
 By Claim: Selecting this option indicates that the customer's invoices can be
aggregated in the Customers Claims screen under System Transactions and
paid in one installment or several installments, in which case the Installments tab
does not appear within the Sales Invoice and the Sales Return screens.
- Grace Period after Due Date: In this field, the user determines the grace period (in
days) during which the customer is allowed to delay the due payment without
penalties.
- Activate Customer From Date\ To Date: In these fields, the user determines the start
and end dates of the period during which the customer-related transactions are
activated if needed.
Hint: Outside the selected period, the customer will be considered
inactive and the system will not carry out any related sales transactions
if the invoice’s date lies outside the determined period and will display
the “This employee is inactive during this period” message.
- Blacklist: When this flag is activated, the system adds the customer to the blacklist,
which prevents any transactions or receipt vouchers that are related to this customer.
Then, a message appears stating that the customer is blacklisted unless the user has
the Bypass Blacklist privilege within the Transactions Privileges screen.
- Send Verification Message to Credit Customer: Ticking this flag allows the system
to send a verification message to the customer when a sale on credit is carried out on
the POS system.

Enterprise Resource Planning 161 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Addition to Blacklist Date: In this field, the user enters the date on which the
customer is added to the blacklist.
- Sell to Customer with Unpaid Debt: When this flag is ticked, the system allows the
user to carry out sales transactions that are related to the customer, who has previous
unpaid debts, provided that the user has the privilege to Sell to Customer with
Unpaid Debt within the Transactions Privileges screen.
- Reason: In this field, the user manually enters the reason for deactivating sales
transactions related to the selected customer.
- License Number: In this field, the user determines the number of the customer’s
license.
- License Owner: In this field, the user enters the name of the license owner.
- Person in Charge: In this field, the user determines the person who will take
responsibility to address any inquiries or requirements.
- Person Authorized to Sign: In this field, the user enters the name of the person who
is authorized to sign the documents that are related to the transactions carried out
between the customer and the organization.
- Use Alerts for Mobile and Email: With the help of this option, the user can determine
how the system will handle alert notifications that are sent via the mobile or email
based on the previously configured settings of the Alert System screens using one of
the following options:
 DONT SEND: If this option is selected for a certain customer, then they will not
receive any alert messages.
 AUTO SEND: If this option is selected for a certain customer, the system will send
them alert messages automatically once the transaction is saved.
 OPTIONAL SEND: If this option is selected for a certain customer, the user will be
able to manually send them alert messages as needed from the related screen.
- Use Beneficiaries: This flag is generally related to the Hajj and Umrah system and
when ticked, the system shows the Beneficiary Number field that is mandatory in the
Hajj and Umrah invoices, the visa system, and the general ledger.

Enterprise Resource Planning 162 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Favorite Accounts: When the user ticks this flag for a certain customer, the system
displays this customer’s account within the Favorite Accounts screen under the
Assisting Systems and displays their available balance.
- Excluded from Promotional Offers: Ticking this flag for a certain customer prevents
the customer from benefiting from promotional offers.
- Used by Hospitals System: Ticking this flag indicates that the customer is a customer
in the hospital system.
- Auto Installment Of Credit Sales/ Number of Instalments/ Number of Instalment
Days: When the user ticks the Auto Installment of Credit Sales flag, the system
shows on the screen both the Number Of Installments and Number Of Installments
Days fields where the user can enter the related data for each customer. This way,
when the user records the customer's sales invoice, all data related to installments will
automatically appear.
Fourth: Home Address
In this tab, the user enters the data of the customer's home address.

- Building Number/ Street/ Neighborhood/ Country/ Governorate Number/ City/

Region Number/ Zip Code/ Additional Number: In these fields, the user determines
the customer's exact address.
- Commercial Registration Number: In this field, the user enters the commercial
registration number of the customer.
- Tax Number (TIN): This field appears when the Use VAT parameter is activated within
the General Parameters screen and is used to determine the customer's tax number.
- Tax Type Number: This field appears if the Use VAT parameter is activated within the
General Parameters screen. Here, the user determines the type of tax that will be
imposed on the customer from the list; whether Personal, Business, or Foreign
Companies.

Enterprise Resource Planning 163 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Fifth: Personal Data

This tab includes the optional data that the user can enter manually as per the
organization's requirements. In the boxes displayed at the bottom of the screen, the user
can upload the customer’s signature form or any other important documents using the
scanner.

Sixth: Addresses and IDs

In this tab, the user enters the customer’s address. This is done by clicking the button on
the screen which displays another screen that includes two tabs; one of them includes the
customer addresses directory while the other includes a list of IDs. In these tabs, the user
can select some data from the screen and enter the other data manually.

Enterprise Resource Planning 164 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Seventh: Additional Data

This tab includes the optional data that the user enters to provide some additional
information about the customer for reference.

- Tax Calculation Method: Here, the user determines how the system will apply the tax
by selecting one of the methods that are predefined within the Configuration screen
under System Configuration. Afterward, the system displays the selected method as
the default tax calculation method in the sales invoice yet the user will be able to
change it.
- Activity: In this field, the user determines the customer’s activity and after saving, this
activity is added to a list that the user can later choose from, after pressing the F9
button, when adding a new customer and link them to a certain activity.
- Registration Type: In this field, the user determines whether the customer is
registered or not using one of the provided options; whether Regular, Consumer,
Unregistered, or Unknown.
- NIS Number: In this field, the user determines the number of the customer in the
statistical records of the concerned authorities in their country.
- Tax Article: In this field, the user determines the tax article that applies to the
customer according to the tax law.
- Capital: Here, the user determines the capital of the customer.
- G.C.C. Customer: Ticking this flag indicates that the customer belongs to the Gulf
Cooperation Council, which is particularly useful in generating reports that show the
amount of value added tax for the customers who belong to the Gulf Cooperation
Council.
- Tax Group Customer: Ticking this flag indicates that the customer belongs to a tax
group depending on the tax calculation methods coded within the Configuration
screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 165 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Sector: In this field, the user determines what sector the customer belongs to; Private
or Governmental. This is particularly important for systems such as the Trailers
Management System because government customers are treated differently than
those related to the private sector.
- Barcode Number: In this field, the user enters the number of the customer's barcode,
which will be used in the distribution system during the customer's visit.
- Open Visit Using: In this field, the user selects a method that opens the visit to the
customer from the list of available methods; Manual, Customer Barcode, or Manual
and Barcode.
- Price Type: This field appears when the Price Includes Sales Tax parameter is
activated in the General Parameters screen. Here, the user can determine the type of
price that will appear by default to the customer in the sales invoice using one of the
provided options; Price without Tax and Price Includes Tax, taking into consideration
that they can change it as needed.
- Global Location Number: Companies use Global Location Number (GLN) to
determine their locations, which helps them select any type or level for the location
required.
- Use Auto Synchronization between Customer and Vendor: With the help of this
flag, the user can activate automated synchronization between customers and vendors.
The system then shows the Vendor Number field where the user can determine the
vendor that will be linked to the selected customer, as well as the User Name and
Password fields that are used by the person authorized to synchronize, and the Web
Server Name field, which is also one of the tools used to synchronize data between
the customer and the vendor.
- Items Sales Limit Type: In this field, the user determines how the limit of item sales
will be applied using one of the following options:
 Unused: When this option is selected, the user will need to specify the sales limits
on the Items Data screen rather than using the customer sales limit on this screen.
 At Customer Level: When this option is selected, the user will need to determine
the limit of item sales for each customer individually, and the system will show
another two fields; one of which is Items Sales Limit Period (in Days) where the

Enterprise Resource Planning 166 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

user enters the limit period in days, and the other is Number of Item Sales Limit
Repetitions During Period, which helps the user control the number of limit
repetitions.
 At Items Level: When this option is selected the user will need to determine the
limit of item sales for each item individually after determining the name and number
of the item, the item sale limit period (in days), the number of sale limit repetition,
and description.
- Sequence: This is a digital meter that tracks the number of customers defined on this
screen.
Eighth: Additional Fields
In this tab, the user can create new fields where they can display any additional data or
information about the customer as needed and use it to generate related reports, taking into
consideration that they can rename these fields using the Texts Translation screen under
general system configuration, which then displays the Customers Data screen so that the
user can modify fields names as needed.

Ninth: Credit Limit

In this tab, the user determines the customer's credit limit at the currency level as follows:

- Currency: In this column, the user selects the currency from the provided list.
- Minimum Limit: Here, the user determines the minimum credit limit that the customer
cannot go under.

Enterprise Resource Planning 167 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Maximum Limit: Here, the user determines the maximum limit that the customer
cannot exceed.
- Transaction Minimum Limit: In this column, the user determines the minimum
allowed transactions limit for the selected customer.
- Transaction Maximum Limit: In this column, the user determines the maximum
allowed transactions limit for the selected customer.
- Disregard Accounts Limits: This column refers to disregarding both the credit and
invoice limits depending on the privileges defined for the user on the Transactions
Privileges screen. It includes the following options:
 Not Allow: When this option is selected, the user will not be allowed to disregard
the credit limit determined for the customer.
 Allowed: When this option is selected, the user will be able to disregard the credit
limit determined for the customer.
 Allowed with Alert: When this option is selected, the system will allow the user to
disregard the credit limit; and an alert message will appear.
- Percentage Of Disregard: In this column, the user needs to determine the maximum
allowed percentage of disregard.
- Maximum Allowed Limit: In this column, the user determines the maximum limit that
can be exceeded.
- Type: Here, the user determines the type of disregard; whether Debit or Credit.
Hint: Customer credit limit modification or deletion is an audited
process, and whenever the user wants to generate a certain report on
any modification or deletion that is carried out on any of the Customer
Data screen fields, they can do so using the Auditing Reports screen
under the Information Management System. They can also generate
reports on customers for whom the authorized users have disregarded
the credit limit and are included in system alerts.
Tenth: Accounts
In this tab, the user can enter the accounts linked to the customer, including the customer's
intermediary accounts such as the contract advance payment intermediary account, sales

Enterprise Resource Planning 168 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

receipt intermediary account, property insurance intermediary account, and the customer's
pending cash intermediary account.
- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, it indicates that the selected account is inactive and
the system will prevent using it in transactions.

Eleventh: Items Activities

This tab appears when the Link Customers to Items' Activities parameter is activated in
the Customers Self-Service tab under the Customers Management System Parameters
screen. Here, the user can link the customer to the items’ activities, which helps display in
the customer self-service system the items related to the activities that are linked to the
customer.

Twelve: Linked Devices

With the help of this tab, the user can grant permissions to the customer devices that use
the Customer Self-Service system.

Thirteenth: Privileges
In this tab, users are granted privileges -at the currency level- to handle the defined
customer, noting that the authorized user can control whether these privileges are to add or
display reports.

Enterprise Resource Planning 169 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Hint: If the user has the privilege to handle an account that is linked to
a certain group, this user will be granted the privilege to deal with the
new customer automatically.

Fourteenth: Customer Sales Limits

In this tab, the user enters the sales limits (amounts) for customers per period.

Fifteenth: Link Customers to Compensation Quantities Policies

This tab appears when the Use Compensation Quantities parameter is activated in the
system's general parameters screen. Here, the user can link customers to the sales
compensation policy that is defined in the Compensation Quantity Coding screen noting
that they can link each customer to one or multiple compensation policies while determining
the effective date for each policy.

Sixteenth: Link Customers to Locations

This tab appears when the Use Concrete Requests parameter is activated. Here, the user
can link the customer to one of the locations added in the General Codlings screen of the
customers management system.

Enterprise Resource Planning 170 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Seventieth: Favorite Items

This tab is particularly useful for users who have access to the Customers Self-Service
system. It displays the favorite items that the customer has added to the customers self-
service system. In other words, this tab includes read-only data.

Eighteenth: Link Customers to Representatives

This tab appears when the Link Customer to Multiple Representatives parameter is
activated within the Customers Management System Parameters screen. Here, the user
can link the customer to multiple representatives, and determine the days on which the
representative is allowed to deal with the customer so that the system allows in the sales
invoice only the representatives linked to the customer in this tab. If the representative field
is defined as mandatory in the Mandatory Fields screen, users will be able to save the
customer’s data only after selecting the representative defined in this tab.
- Deactivated: Ticking this flag indicates that the representative is inactive and thus, the
system prevents any transactions that are related to this representative.

Enterprise Resource Planning 171 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Nineteenth: Link Customers to Collectors

This tab appears when activating the parameter of Link Customer to Multiple Collectors
in the system parameters screen. In this screen, more than one collector is linked to the
customer and the days on which the customer deals with collectors are determined so that
the sales invoice can only be dealt with the collectors linked with the customer in this tab.
- Deactivated: This flag is ticked to deactivate the collector. Consequently, the system does
not allow using the deactivated collector in Transactions.
Hint: The system allows duplicating the collector for the customer in
different cost centers. It should be noted that the deactivation of the
collector is checked in the sales invoice by the center (Check Center at
the level of Master in Invoice).

Twentieth: Guarantees Data

In this tab, the user enters the data of available customer-related guarantees as follows:

- Guarantee Status: When the user selects the Active option here, it indicates that the
guarantee is still valid, meanwhile when the user selects the Inactive option, it
indicates that the guarantee has expired.
- Guarantee Type: In this field, the user selects the type of guarantee that is related to
the customer; whether Legal, Commercial, Banking, or Real Estate.
- Guarantee Start Date/ Guarantee End Date: In these fields, the user needs to enter
the start and end dates of the customer's guarantee respectively.

Enterprise Resource Planning 172 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Guarantor Name/ Guarantor Address: In these fields, the user records the name and
address of the guarantor respectively.
- Guarantor Activity Nature/ Financial Position: In the first field, the user enters the
nature of the guarantor's activity; whether commercial, industrial, or service, and in the
second field, the user enters the guarantor’s financial position.
- Other Data: These data include; Guarantee Value, Guarantee Registration Date,
Registration Number in Court, Registration Number at Chamber of Commerce,
Guarantor Commercial Register Number, Guarantor Phone Number, and the
Guarantor Fax Number.
Twenty-First: Delivery Location
Here, the user enters the location to which the customer’s goods will be delivered.

Twenty-Second: Transactions
Once the user logs into this tab, the system displays the financial transaction movements
that are related to the customer taking into consideration that the user can display the
movements carried out across the customer’s account at the currency level.

Twenty-Three: Statistics
In this tab, the system automatically displays the summary of the customer-related
movements. This includes the opening balance, current balance, sales, sales return, net
discount, receipt vouchers, and unmatured check amounts.

Enterprise Resource Planning 173 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Save: After completing the data entry, users should press save.
Twenty-Four: Toolbar
Below are some of the buttons that are included in the toolbar:
- Modify Customers Data: Using this button, the user can modify the data included in
all Customer Data screen fields at the same time rather than modifying it at the
customer level.
Remark: The Customer Classification field can be modified along with
the fields that are collectively modified on the screen.
Note: When the user chooses to edit the Collector Number field -in
case the Link Customer to Multiple Collectors parameter is
activated- the system shows in the Master Data section another field
called Transaction Type. This field includes two options one of which is
Link to Customers which helps the user link the customers defined on
the screen to the collector selected in the field that appears in the
middle of the screen, and the other option is Modify Customer Data,
which when selected the system shows another field called Collector
Number in the Master Data section to help the user change the data of
the customer linked to the collector selected therein.

Enterprise Resource Planning 174 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Closing Balance by Currency: The user can review the total balance of the customer
at the currency level by pressing the Closing Balance by Currency button in the
toolbar.

- Account Movement: Using this button, the user can review the customer’s account
movements in the multi-option screen that is shown displaying the account movements
and the closing balance at the currency level taking into consideration that they can
export these movements to an Excel file without having to open the account statement.

Enterprise Resource Planning 175 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Grades Evaluation

Use: This screen helps the user re-evaluate the customers' grades based on customer
evaluation criteria that are activated in the Evaluation Criteria screen and thus, the system
automatically updates the customers' grades.

How To Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Document Number/ Date: In these fields, the system automatically displays the
related data and allows users to modify it.
- From Customer/ To: With the help of these fields, the user can determine the range
of customers that will be included in the evaluation, which can represent one customer
or more.
- Customers Groups\To: With the help of these fields, the user determines the range of
customers’ groups that will be included in the evaluation, which can represent one
group or more.
- Customers Types\To: With the help of these fields, the user determines the range of
customer types that will be included in the evaluation.
- From Date/ To: With the help of these fields, the user determines the period during
which the evaluation will be carried out.
- Evaluation Criteria Sequence: To activate the criteria based on which the customers
will be evaluated, the user needs to tick )✓( the flag corresponding to each criterion,

Enterprise Resource Planning 176 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

and thus, the system will display a column for this particular criterion in the Detailed
Data section.
- Calculate Criteria: When the user clicks this button, the system calculates the
selected customers’ evaluation criteria, and then, automatically displays the evaluation
result at the customer level in the detailed data section.
- Update Customer Data: When the user ticks (✓) this flag, the system updates the
grades of the customers included in the evaluation within the Customers Data screen.
- Save: After completing data entry, users should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 177 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customer Opening Balances

Use: This screen appears when the selected option in the Link to General Ledger
parameter is Accounts Group and in which case the opening balances are determined at
the customer level -in a one-phase or multi-phase process preferably at the beginning of
the financial period-, the total balances of the customers are posted to the customer group
account that is defined in the chart of accounts and the system may automatically display
the opening balances of the following year. Customers’ opening balances are usually the
unpaid debt a customer owes to the organization during a previous period. But, if the
selected option in the Link to General Ledger parameter is Multi Accounts, this screen
does not appear.

How To Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Balance Type: In this field, the By Customer option appears by default given that this
screen handles the customers opening balances.
- View: With the help of this field, the user determines how the system will display data
using one of the following options:
 By Accounts: When this option is selected, the system displays the detailed data
per account.
 By Centers: When this option is selected, the system displays the detailed data
per cost center, even if the account is repeated.

Enterprise Resource Planning 178 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- From Account/ To: In these fields, the user selects the accounts determined for the
customer group by pressing the F9 button.
- From Customer/ To: In these fields, the user selects the target customers by pressing
the F9 button.
- Currency: In this field, the user selects the currency that will be fetched to the detailed
data as the opening balances currency.
- Project Number/ To/ Activity Number/ To/ Center/ To: In these fields, the user
presses F9 to select the centers, projects, and activities that will be linked to the
customer’s opening balances.
- Due Date: In this field, the user enters the due date of the opening balances, which
will appear automatically in the detailed data section upon fetching data, noting that
they can also enter the due date manually for each entry added in the detailed data.
- Fetch Accounts: After determining the data in the fields shown on the screen, the
user clicks on the Fetch Accounts button which displays the data of these fields in the
detailed section.
- Recording Opening Balance:
 Debit or Credit Balance in Local Currency: In the Credit and Debit columns, the
user determines the opening balance of customers per cost center, project, and
activity if any.
 Debit or Credit Balance in Foreign Currency: In the Foreign Debit and Foreign
Credit columns, the user determines the customer’s opening balance; whether
debit or credit in the foreign currency, and then, the system automatically multiplies
the amount by the exchange rate previously specified to calculate the balance in
the local currency.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.
Remark: Users can manually enter the data of the Detailed section,
without determining them in the Master section, by pressing the F9
button. Afterward, they can determine the opening balances as
explained above.

Enterprise Resource Planning 179 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Medical Network Data

Use: This screen appears when the Use Medical Insurance System parameter is activated
within the Customers Management System Parameters screen. Here, users can define
medical entities, such as hospitals and medical centers that the insurance companies
collaborate with to provide the organization with the necessary health care services.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Network Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the number of the
medical network; and allows the user to modify it.
- Network Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the medical network that
insurance companies will collaborate with in the system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the medical network that
insurance companies will collaborate with in the system’s foreign language.
- Address/ Phone Number: In these fields, the user enters the pre-defined address
and phone number of the medical network respectively.
- Inactive: When the user ticks this flag, the system stops any transactions related to
the selected medical network.
- User Resp. For DEACT: In this field, the system automatically displays the name of
the user who has deactivated the transactions related to the selected network.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation.

Enterprise Resource Planning 180 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the medical network.
- Save: After completing data entry, users should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 181 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Insurance Beneficiaries
Use: This screen appears when the Use Medical Insurance System parameter is activated
within the Customers Management System Parameters screen. Here, the user defines
the beneficiary entities, institutions, and organizations contracting with the insurance
company to provide their employees with the necessary insurance services.

How To Use Screen Use

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Entity Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable number for
the entity.
- Entity Name: In this field, the user enters the entity that benefits from the insurance
company in the system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the entity that benefits from the insurance
company in the system’s foreign language.
- Address/ Phone Number: In these fields, the user enters the address and phone
number of the insurance beneficiary respectively.
- Website: In this field, the user enters the website of the insurance beneficiary.
- Inactive: When the user ticks this flag, the system stops any transactions related to
the beneficiary entity.
- User Resp. for DEACT: In this field, the system automatically displays the name of
the user who has deactivated the transactions related to the beneficiary entity.

Enterprise Resource Planning 182 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
any transactions related to the beneficiary entity.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 183 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Insurance Items Group

Use: This screen appears when the Use Medical Insurance System parameter is activated
within the Customers Management System Parameters screen. Here, the user defines
the insurance item groups that the insurer covers for the beneficiaries based on the
previously set agreement.

How To Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Group Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable number for
the group.
- Group Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the insurance items group in
the system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the insurance items group in
the system’s foreign language.
- Group Type: In this field, the user determines how the insurance items will be grouped
using one of the following options:
 By Item Groups: When this option is selected, items are compiled into Main, Sub,
Sub-sub, Assisting, and Detailed groups, and thus, the system displays the
selected group number and name in the Value and Name fields, within the
Detailed section, to refer to all items that belong to this particular group.
 By Item Type: When this option is selected, items are compiled based on the
types that are pre-defined in the Items Types screen under Warehouse System

Enterprise Resource Planning 184 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Configuration, and thus, the system displays the selected type number and name
in the Value and Name fields within the Detailed section to refer to all items that
belong to this particular type.
 By Item Classification: When this option is selected, items are compiled based on
the item classification that is predefined within the Item Classification screen
under Warehouse System Inputs, and thus, the system displays the selected
classification number and name in the Value and Name fields in the Detailed
section to refer to all items that belong to this particular classification.
 By Item: When this option is selected, items are compiled based on the items data
that is predefined within the Items Data screen under Warehouse System Inputs,
and thus, the system displays the selected item number and name in the Value
and Name fields in the Detailed section.
- Data Filtration: Users can filter the data that appear in the fields displayed on the
system by specifying a certain range of data using the From and To fields noting that
these fields change based on the selected option in the Group Type field.
- Fetch Data: When the user clicks this button, the system displays the data of the
detailed section based on those determined in the previous step.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 185 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Insurers Data
Use: This screen appears when the Use Medical Insurance System parameter is activated
within the Customer Management System Parameters screen. Here, the user can define
the insurance companies that the organization collaborates with to provide the employees
with different insurance services noting that this is done for each specified contribution
category. In other words, this screen includes all the data that is related to the insurance
company's contract with the medical entity.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
First: Company Data
- Company Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the number of the
insurance company and allows the user to modify it.
- Company Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the insurance company in
the system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the insurance company in the
foreign language determined for the system.
- Calculate Tax on Insurer: When this flag is ticked, the system calculates the tax on
the insurer according to the calculation method that is selected for each patient within
the Patients Data screen.
- Phone Number/ Website/ Address: In these fields, the user enters data manually.

Enterprise Resource Planning 186 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Discount Percentage: This field determines the discount value that the insurance
company receives from pharmacies and medical entities, and which is deducted in
favor of the company from each invoice.
- Calculate Contribution Amount Based on: In this field, the user determines the how
the contribution amount of the insurance company will be calculated using one of the
following options:
 Price: When this option is selected, the contribution amount is directly calculated
based on the invoice price.
 Price - Discount: When this option is selected, the contribution amount is
calculated based on the invoice’s net value which is equal to the invoice price
minus the discount amount.
- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions related to the
selected insurance company.
- User RESP. For DEACT: In this field, the system displays the name of the user who
has deactivated the transactions related to the insurance company.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation once the user ticks the Inactive flag.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user enters the reason for deactivating the
transactions related to the insurance company.
Second: Categories and Entities
Upon contracting with insurance companies, the insuring parties agree to provide insurance
services to the beneficiaries based on specific limits and contribution categories. These
categories regulate the relationship between the beneficiary entity and the insurer.
Therefore, for each entity, the user must define and link a certain category or more based
on the policies that the organization follows while providing insurance services to the
employees.

- Category Number: In this column, the system displays an automatic serial number
once the user determines the category name.

Enterprise Resource Planning 187 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Category Name: In this column, the user determines the category name in the
system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this column, the user enters the category name in the foreign
language specified on the system.
- Entity Number: In this column, the user selects the beneficiary entity from the list
defined in the Insurance Beneficiaries screen and which appears when pressing the
F9 button, noting that an entity can be duplicated if it is linked to multiple contribution
categories.
- Discount %: This column displays the discount value that the insurance company
receives from pharmacies and medical authorities and which is deducted in favor of the
company based on every specified category.
- Contracting Date: In this column, the user enters the start date of the company’s
contract with the beneficiary.
- To Date: In this column, the user enters the end date of the company's contract with
the beneficiary.
- Modify Subscribers Contribution % and Limit: When this flag is ticked, the system
allows users to modify the contribution percentage and limit granted to subscribers.
- Deactivate: Whenever a user wants to stop the collaboration of the entity with the
selected insurer, they can do so by ticking this flag.
- User Resp. for DEACT/ Deactivation Date: In these fields, the system automatically
displays the user who has deactivated the beneficiary entity, date, and time of
deactivation respectively.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user writes the reason for deactivating the
transactions related to the beneficiary entity.
Third: Medical Networks
Medical networks are the hospitals, clinics, medical centers, and doctors with whom the
insurance company contracts to provide medical services to employees of the beneficiary
entities based on the conditions and limits agreed upon by both the beneficiary and the
insurance company for each contribution category.

Enterprise Resource Planning 188 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Network Number/ Name: In these columns, the user selects the medical network that
will be linked to a certain contribution category of beneficiary entity from the list that the
system displays when pressing the F9 button.
- Copy Insurer Data/ Category/ Data Type: To facilitate data entry, the system allows
the user to copy the data of a particular insurer and paste it for another insurer. To do
this, the user first needs to select the insurer from which data will be copied, and the
category linked to this insurer and then paste using one of the following options in the
Data Type field:
 All: This option allows the user to copy the data of all selected category tabs.
 Medical Networks: This option allows the user to copy the data of the selected
category medical network.
 Insurance Items Group: This option allows the user to copy the data of the
insurance items group that is related to the selected category.
 Contribution Percentage: This option allows the user to copy the contribution
percentage of the selected category.
 Granted Limit: This option allows the user to copy data of the limit granted to the
selected category.
Hint: In this tab, users can only define the network of inpatients. This is
because the system handles the network defined in this tab as an
internal network, and the networks that are not defined in this tab as
external networks.
Fourth: Insurance Items Group
Insurance items group are the items coded within the Insurance Items Group screen under
System Inputs noting that each group includes multiple items aggregated together to
facilitate data entry and issuance procedures, and similarly, all contribution percentages and
limits that apply to each group, applies also on the items belonging to it. Here, the user can
find the following:

Enterprise Resource Planning 189 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Group Number/ Name: In these columns, the user needs first to select the number of the
required group of items, which is predefined in the Insurance Items Group screen, from the
list that appears when pressing the F9 button. Once done, the system automatically
displays the name of this selected group.
- Discount Percentage: This column includes the discount value that the insurance
company receives from pharmacies and medical entities, and which is deducted in favor of
the company at the item group level.
Hint: If the discount percentage is not determined at the insurance items group
level, the system calculates the discount at the category level. And, if the
discount percentage is not determined at the category level, the system
calculates the discount at the insurer level.
- Discount % for Chronic Medicines: In this column, the user enters the discount
percentage that is determined for the chronic medications, and which the insurer
receives, at the insurance items group level.
- Contribution Percent In Network: In this column, the user determines the insurance
value percentage that the beneficiary will contribute with in case they are receiving
services from the medical network that is linked to the selected category and
percentage at the insurance items group level.
- Contribution Percent Out of Network: In this column, the user determines the
insurance value percentage that the beneficiary will contribute with in case they are
receiving services from outside the medical network that is linked to the selected
category, and percentage at the insurance items group level.
- Invoice Limit in Network (Local Currency): In this column, the user can determine
the maximum amount that a beneficiary can reach per invoice when receiving services
from inside the medical network that is linked to the selected category. If no limits are
set, the invoice will be paid completely.
- Invoice Limit Out. Network (Local Currency): In this column, the user can determine
the maximum amount that a beneficiary can reach per invoice when receiving services
from outside the medical network that is linked to the selected category. If no limits are
set, the invoice will be paid completely.

Enterprise Resource Planning 190 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Fifth: Insurance Items Issuance

Using this tab, the user can determine how the insurance items groups and the chronic
medications are dispensed.

- Group Number/ Name: Here, the user selects the number of the required group of
items from the list that is predefined within the Insurance Items Group screen, and
which appears when pressing the F9 button. And once done, the system displays the
group name.
- Issuance Method/ Issue Chronic Medications By: In these columns the user
determines how the required medication items will be issued using one of the following
options:
 Issuance by Approval Code: When this option is selected, the system will allow
medication items issuance as per approval of insurance company.
 Exceptional Issuance: When this option is selected, the system will not allow
medication items issuance unless the insurance company provides an exception.
Sixth: Contribution Percentage
In this tab, the user enters the coverage percentage that the insurance company has
determined for each member of the beneficiary’s family as agreed with the contracting
organization (that is included in the selected category) as follows:

- Kinship/ Name: In these columns, the system displays data automatically and thus the
user can directly enter the coverage percentage next to each name; whether the
parents, children, or wife.
- Contribution Percent In Network: In this column, the user determines the insurance
value percentage that the beneficiary will contribute with in case they are receiving
services from the medical network that is linked to the selected category.

Enterprise Resource Planning 191 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Contribution Percent Out of Network: In this column, the user determines the
insurance value percentage that the beneficiary will contribute with in case they are
receiving services from outside the medical network that is linked to the selected
category.
- Chronic Medication Contribution Percentage: In this column, the user determines
the chronic medications cost percentage that the beneficiary will bear depending on the
specified kinship.
- Invoice Limit in Network (Local Currency): In this column, the user can determine
the maximum amount that a beneficiary can reach per invoice when receiving services
from inside the medical network that is linked to the selected category.
- Invoice Limit Out Network (Local Currency): In this column, the user can determine
the maximum amount that a beneficiary can reach per invoice when receiving services
from outside the medical network that is linked to the selected category.
- Chronic Medicines Invoice Limit (Local Currency): In this column, the user can
determine the maximum amount that a beneficiary can reach per invoice for chronic
medications cost depending on the specified kinship.
- Maximum Contribution Amount Per Invoice (Local Currency): In this column, the
user can determine the maximum contribution amount that a beneficiary can bear in
each invoice depending on the specified kinship.
Seventh: Granted Limit
This tab includes the data of monthly and annual limits allowed for the subscribers receiving
health insurance and their relatives.

- Kinship: In this column, the user selects the subscriber or one of their relatives from
the provided list to determine their monthly and annual insurance limits, taking into
consideration that both the subscriber and the relative who receives the benefits can
have the same monthly and annual limits. And in this case, the user needs to enter the
subscriber and their relative in the same row before determining the insurance limits.

Enterprise Resource Planning 192 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Group Number/ Name: In these columns, the user determines the insurance items
groups based on which every insured person is assigned a certain limit.
- Monthly and Annual Limit (Local Currency): In these columns, the user determines
the monthly and annual limits for each subscriber (main insured) and each of their
relatives (co-insured) at the group level.
Hint: Data entry in insurer tabs needs to be made for each category
and beneficiary entity receiving health insurance services.
Eighth: Contracting Terms
With the help of this tab, the user can determine the terms and requirements that regulate
the contract between the beneficiary and the insurer. For example, the beneficiary may
need to submit the personal ID or family card of the subscriber’s relatives, or any other
documents necessary to provide insurance services.

- Contracting Term/ Term Description: After determining the serial number of the
contracting term, the user needs to enter a description of that term in the related
columns respectively.
- Mandatory In Sales Invoice: When the user ticks this flag for a certain term, the
system will not save the invoice unless it verifies that the user has fulfilled this term.
- Save: After completing the data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 193 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Member Insurance Data

Use: In this screen, the user defines the data of the subscriber and the relative who
receives the insurance benefits, the chronic medication items issued to the subscriber, as
well as the issuance limit.

How to Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
First: Insurance Data
- Company Number: In this field, the user selects the number of the insurance
company that will provide the contracting entity with health care services from the list
that appears when pressing the F9 button.
- Entity Number: In this field, the user selects from the list that appears when pressing
the F9 button the number of the contracting entity that will receive the health care
services, and in which the insurance member works.
- Member Insurance Number: In this field, the user enters the insurance number that
the insurer has created for the subscriber.
- Member Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a serial number for
the subscriber and allows the user to modify it for each beneficiary.
- Family Insurance Number: In this field, the user enters the insurance number of the
main subscriber (beneficiary) whose relatives receive the same insurance benefits.
This helps follow-up on the health insurance for all the subscriber’s family members.

Enterprise Resource Planning 194 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Kinship: In this field, the user selects the relationship between the subscriber and the
beneficiary of the insurance.
- Member Name/ Foreign Name: In these fields, the user enters the name of the
subscriber or the insurance beneficiary in the system’s default and foreign languages
respectively.
- Insurance Card Copy: In this part of the screen, the user can import a copy of the
beneficiary insurance card by clicking the Upload Image icon.
- Gender: Here, the user selects the gender of the beneficiary; Male or Female.
- Region Number: In this field, the user selects the region to which the subscriber
belongs from the provided list.
- Nationality: In this field, the user selects the nationality of the subscriber from the
provided list noting that they can add other nationalities using the Employees General
Codlings screen under General Configuration.
- Calculate Tax on Insurer: This flag appears ticked when the Calculate Tax flag is
activated for nationalities in the Employees General Coding screen; and the user will
not be able to modify it.
- Card Number/ Type: In the Card Number field, the user needs to enter the number of
the member’s card, and then determine its type in the Card Type field; whether
personal, family, passport, or proof of residence.
- Insurance Card Issuance Date/ Expiry Date: In these fields, the user enters the
issuance and expiry dates of the insurance card, which then helps suspend the
insurance services after the card expiration.
- Category Number: In this field, the user determines the category to which the member
belongs from the list that appears when pressing the F9 button.
- Contribution Percentage: In this field, the system automatically displays the
contribution percentage that the beneficiary or one of their relatives will bear once the
insurance category is determined. This the contribution percentage that predetermined
in the Contribution Percentage tab within the Insurer Data screen; yet the user can
modify it for each member separately.
- Phone Number/ Address/ E-mail/ Birth Date: In these fields, the user enters the
phone number, address, e-mail, and date of birth of the insurance member.

Enterprise Resource Planning 195 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Invoice Limit in Network (Local Currency): In this field, the system automatically
determines a –modifiable- maximum amount that a beneficiary can reach per invoice
when receiving services from inside the medical network that is linked to the selected
category. This is the maximum limit that predetermined within the Contribution
Percentage tab in the Insurer Data screen.
- Invoice Limit Out Network in Local Currency: In this field, the system automatically
determines a –modifiable- maximum amount that a beneficiary can reach per invoice
when receiving services from outside the medical network that is linked to the selected
category. This is the maximum limit that predetermined within the Contribution
Percentage tab in the Insurer Data screen.
- Chronic Items Issued to Member: In this part of the screen, the user determines the
chronic illnesses medications that the beneficiary receives regularly, such as diabetes
and liver diseases items, as follows:
 Item Number/ Item Name: In these columns, the user selects, from the list that
appears when pressing F9 button, the number of the item that will be issued to the
member and its name respectively.
 Unit: Here, once the user determines the item number, the system automatically
displays the item’s unit. If the item has multiple measurement units, the user can
select a certain unit from the list.
 Daily Dose: In this column, the user determines the daily dose prescribed for the
insurance beneficiary.
 Monthly Purchase Quantity: In this column, the user determines the purchase
quantity for item units per month.
- Inactive: When this flag is ticked, the system stops any transactions that are related to
the insured member or one of their relatives.
- User Responsible for DEACT: In this field, the system displays the user who has the
privilege to deactivate the transactions that are related to the insured member as well
as the deactivation date.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system displays the deactivation time and date
when the user ticks the Inactive flag.

Enterprise Resource Planning 196 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the deactivation reason of
the insured member.
Second: Movement
In this tab, the system automatically displays the sales invoices issued during a certain
period for each beneficiary. This helps follow up on their insurance.

Third: Import from Excel

- Excel Program Path: In this field, the user determines the path of the Excel program
file in the Default Data tab within the Users Data screen for each user.
C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office14\EXCEL.EXE
- Formatting and Importing Excel File: The user needs to format the Excel worksheet
according to the format that is determined on the system in the Member Insurance
Data screen. This format consists of predefined and formatted columns that help the
user prepare the Excel sheet and start importing data into the screen provided that all
settings are correctly configured.

Enterprise Resource Planning 197 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Coupon Data
Use: In this screen, the user can code the coupons configured within the Coupons Types
screen under System Configuration to be able to use them in system transactions
including coupon distribution on representatives, retrieving coupons from representatives,
and coupon selling.

How To Use Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
First: Master Data
- Transaction Sequence: In this field, the user determines the document sequence.
- Date: In this field, the user determines the coupon issuance date.
- Type Number: In this field, the user selects a certain type number from the list of
types previously defined in the Coupon Types screen to link the coupon to. And thus,
the system displays the data of the following fields:
 Book Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a number that may
refer to the book number only or both the book number and category code that
appears when the Include Category Code in Book Sequence flag is ticked in the
Coupon Types screen under System Configuration.
 Number of Coupons: In this field, the system automatically displays the number of
coupons specified in the Number of Coupons in Book field within the Coupons
Types screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 198 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 From Coupon Number/ To: In these fields, the system automatically displays the
number of coupons, whether this number includes the category code or only refers
to the book number based on the Coupons Types screen configuration.
 Coupons Book Price: In this field, the system automatically displays the default
selling price determined for the book specified in the Coupons Types screen.
- Reference Number: In this field, the user can optionally enter the reference number of
the coupon data, which may include digits or letters. However, if the Reference
Number is Mandatory parameter is activated in the system parameters screen, then
the user must determine one.
- Description: In this field, the user enters a clear description of the coupon data.
- Inactive: When the user ticks this flag, the system will stop any transactions related to
the selected coupon type.
Second: Additional data
In this tab, the user enters any additional data that is related to the selected coupon but not
included in the rest of the screen tabs, noting that they can rename these fields using the
Texts Translation screen under the System General Configuration. This helps the user
generate reports on the types of coupons.

Third: Fetching Options

In this tab, the user determines the number of coupons, price, issuance, and expiry dates of
the coupons and then, clicks the Fetch Data button. This way, the system displays the
coupon data automatically in the detailed section.

Fourth: Detailed data

Once the user clicks the Fetch Data button in the Fetching Options tab, the system
displays the coupons data in the detailed section as follows:

Enterprise Resource Planning 199 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- S\N: In this column, the system displays automatic serial numbers for the book
coupons.
- Coupon Number: In this column, the system automatically displays the coupon
numbers based on the Coupons Types screen settings configuration. However, it
should be noted that the user can enter the detailed data manually.
- Price: The system divides the default selling price of the book specified in the Coupon
Coding screen by the number of coupons in the book, and then automatically displays
the price of each coupon in this column.
- Issuance/ Expiry Date: If the issuance and expiry dates are the same for all coupons,
the user needs to determine them in the related fields at the top of the fetch options
tab, and then, the system will automatically display these specified dates for all
coupons in the detailed data section and allows the user to modify them. If each
coupon has different issuance and expiry dates, the user will have to enter them
manually at the coupon level in the detailed data section.
- Sold: This flag appears ticked automatically for the coupons that have been sold within
the Coupon Sales screen.
- Used This flag appears ticked automatically for the coupons that have been used in
the sales invoice.
- Inactive: After saving data, the user can deactivate coupons whenever they want to do
so by ticking this flag after clicking Modify button.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user can save data.

Enterprise Resource Planning 200 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Loyalty Program Coding

Use: Loyalty programs are incentive programs designed to attract customers and encourage
them to buy more of the items that the organization provides, where the points that a
customer earns as a discount or when purchasing certain items are monitored and
calculated based on certain methods that enable the customer to redeem the value of these
points. In this screen, the user can code one or multiple loyalty programs depending on the
sales policies followed by the organization, noting that this screen appears if the Use
Loyalty System parameter is activated in the Customer Loyalty tab within the Customers
Management System Parameters screen.

How to Use Screen

- Type Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a serial number for the
loyalty program when the user clicks on the Add button. This is the number of the
loyalty program type that needs to be coded.
- Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the loyalty program in the default
language of the system.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the loyalty program in the
foreign language that is determined in the system.
- Activation Date: In this field, the user determines the activation date on which the
loyalty program becomes effective.
- Expiry Date: Here, the user determines the expiry date on which the loyalty program
ends and, no points are calculated.

Enterprise Resource Planning 201 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Minimum Amount to Calculate Points: In this field, the user determines the minimum
amount that the customer's invoice cannot go below so that the system can calculate
the earned points.
- Minimum Points to Redeem: In this field, the user determines the minimum number
of earned points that the customer can redeem.
- Points Calculation Method: Loyalty programs can be coded based on the following
available calculation methods:
 Amount: When this method is selected, the user will need to determine the value
of a single point. Afterward, the system divides the invoice amount by this value
and the result will be the number of points calculated for the customer. For
example, if the point value is 1,000 dollars and the total customer invoices amount
is 8,000 dollars, the number of points calculated for the customer will be 8 points.

 Below is how the points are calculated when the selected option in the Calculation
Method field is Amount:
▪ Amount Per Point: In this field, the user needs to determine the value of a
single point.
▪ Redemption Value Per Point: Here, the user determines the redemption value
for a single point.
▪ Amount and Its Multiplications: When this method is selected, the user will
need to determine a standard amount that can be used and its multiplications to
calculate the earned points.

 Below is how the points are calculated when the selected option in the Calculation
Method field is Amount and its Multiplications:

Enterprise Resource Planning 202 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

▪ Amount: In this field, the user needs to determine the standard amount that
will be used for calculating points.
▪ Number of Points: Here, the user needs to determine the number of points
that is equivalent to the specified standard amount.
▪ Redemption Amount: In this field, the user needs to determine the standard
amount according to which the points calculated will be redeemed.
▪ Number of Points: Here, the user needs to determine the number of points
equivalent to the standard redemption amount.
 Segments: When this method is selected, the system displays the following tabs:
▪ Points Calculation: Here, the user enters the data as follows:

 From Amount/ To Amount: In these two columns, the user determines the range
of each segment in the loyalty program.
 Number of Points: In this field, the user needs to determine the number of points
that the customer will earn when their sales reach the specified segment limits
whether at the invoice level or cumulatively at the balance level.
▪ Points Redemption: Here, the user enters the data as follows:

 From Point/ To Point: In these columns, the user determines the maximum and
minimum number of points for each segment.
 Amount: In the field, the user enters the redemption amount that the customer will
get when their earned points reach the specified segment limits.

Enterprise Resource Planning 203 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Deactivate: When this flag is ticked, the system will stop any transactions that are
related to the selected loyalty program.
- Deactivation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the time and date of
deactivation.
- Deactivation Reason: In this field, the user needs to enter the reason for deactivating
the loyalty program.
- Save: After completing the data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 204 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Loyalty Cards
Use: Loyalty cards are cards issued by the organization to encourage customers to buy
more items using loyalty programs or discount cards. And in this screen, the user can code
the discount or sales cards that are related to loyalty programs, which helps control the
issuance of these cards and follow up on their statuses.

Hint: Loyalty Cards screen appears when either the Use Discount
Cards and Use Loyalty System parameters or both are activated in the
Customers Management System Parameters screen.
How to Use Screen
To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Card Number/ To: In these fields, the user can determine the range of the cards that
will be issued. For example, if the user needs to print 100 cards, then in the Card
Number field they need to enter 1 and in the To field, they need to enter number 100.
- Card Type: In this field, the user selects the card type using one of the following
options:
 Discount Card: This type appears if the Use Discount Cards parameter is
activated in the Customers Management System Parameters screen, and when
selected, the system displays other discount-related fields and columns.
 First: In the fields, that appear when selecting the Discount Card option, the user
needs to fill in the following data:

Enterprise Resource Planning 205 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

▪ Discount Card Type: Here, the user selects the card type from the list of types
previously defined in the Discount Cards Types screen under the System
Configuration.
▪ Expiry Date: In this field, the user determines the expiry date of the discount
cards manually.
▪ Discount Percentage/ Discount Amount: Once the user determines the
discount card type, the system automatically determines the discount
percentage or amount as previously determined in the Discount Cards Types
screen, and allows the user to modify it.
▪ Invoice Minimum Limit: In this field, the user enters the minimum allowed
amount per sales invoice based on which the customer will be eligible to earn a
discount.
Second: Transaction Type: In this field, the user selects the requested transaction type as
needed. If the user needs to display previous discount cards, they should select Show
Data, but if they need to issue new discount cards, they should select the Fetch Data
option.
Third: Fetch Data: When the user clicks the Fetch Data button, the system automatically
displays in the Detailed section columns the discount cards’ data based on the filled in
fields of the Master section, and thus, the user will need to do the following:
- Deactivate: If the user wants to deactivate a certain discount card, they can do so by
ticking the Deactivate flag corresponding to this card, taking into consideration that the
system will not allow any transaction related to this card unless the user unticks this
flag.
- Used: This flag appears ticked for discount cards in use.
- Use Only Once: By ticking this flag next to a certain discount card, the user indicates
that this card can be used only once.
- Loyalty Program Card: This type appears if the Use Loyalty System parameter is
activated in the Customers Management System Parameters screen and when it is
selected, the system displays on the screen other related columns and fields.

Enterprise Resource Planning 206 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

First: In the fields, that appear when selecting the Loyalty Program Card option, the user
needs to fill in the following data:
- Loyalty Program Type: Here, the user selects the type of the loyalty program from the
list of types previously defined in the Loyalty Program Coding screen under System
Inputs.
- Warehouse Number: Here, the user selects the warehouse where this type of loyalty
program cards will be applied. If no warehouse is selected, any card selected here will
apply to all warehouses.
- POS Number: Here, the user determines the number of the point of sale from the list
of points previously defined in the Points of Sale System. If no particular point of sale
is selected, the selected cards will be used with all available points.
Second: Transaction Type: In this field, the user determines the required type of
transaction according as needed. If the user wants to display previous loyalty cards, then
they should select the Show Data option. If they want to issue new loyalty cards, they
should select the Fetch Data option.
Third: Fetch Data: When the user clicks the Fetch Data button, the system automatically
displays the loyalty cards’ data in the Detailed section columns based on the fields filled in
the Master section, and thus, the user will need to do the following:
- Deactivate: If the user wants to deactivate a certain loyalty card, they can do so by
ticking the Deactivate flag corresponding to this card, taking into consideration that the
system will not allow any transaction related to this card unless the user unticks this
flag.

Enterprise Resource Planning 207 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Used: This flag appears ticked for loyalty cards in use.

- Import from Excel Sheet: Using this button, the user can import loyalty or discount
cards from an Excel sheet provided that the imported file is formatted as indicated on
the system, taking into consideration that formatting may differ based on the selected
card type.

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 208 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Loyalty Program Transactions

Use: This screen allows the user to do the following:
- Enter the opening balance (points) for cash customers.
- Add new points to an existing balance.
- Deduct points from an existing balance.

How to use the screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
First: Master Data
In these fields, the user needs to manually fill in the data, depending on which, the system
will automatically fill in the Detailed section columns.
- Group: In this field, the user selects a certain group from the list of the groups
previously defined in the Cash Customers Groups screen.
- Loyalty Program Type: In this field, the user selects the type of loyalty program from
the list of types previously defined in the Loyalty Program Coding screen.
- From Customer Number/ To: With the help of these fields, the user can determine
the range of the customers for whom one of the following loyalty program transactions
will be implemented; whether Add Points, Deduct Points, or Opening Balance.
- Fetch Data: Clicking this button allows the system to automatically display the detailed
data based on what is determined in the master data fields section.
- Points Calculation Method: In this field, the user determines the calculation method
that will apply to the customer points by selecting one of the following options:

Enterprise Resource Planning 209 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Opening Balance: When this option is selected, the loyalty program points will be
added as opening balance for the customer.
 Add Points: When this option is selected, the loyalty program points will be added
to an existing points balance.
 Deduct Points: When this option is selected, the loyalty program points will be
deducted from the customer's existing points balance.
- Number of Points: Here, the user determines the number of customer point, which
represents both added and deducted points and upon fetching data, this value will
appear automatically in the Number of Points columns in the Detailed section.
Second: Detailed data
In this section, the system displays data automatically based on the entries previously
determined in the Master data section when the user press the Fetch Data button.
However, the user will still can enter these data manually.
- Transaction Number: In this column, the system automatically displays a serial
number after saving data.
- Date: In this column, the system displays a non-modifiable date for the transaction
once the data are fetched or the customer number is determined in the detailed
section, taking into consideration that if the user is entering an opening balance, the
date automatically appears at the beginning of the financial year specified in the
system.
- Customer Number/ Customer Name: In these fields, the user determines the
customer number manually or by selection from the list of cash customers previously
defined on the system and which appears when pressing the F9 button.
- Loyalty Program Type: In this column, the system shows the type of loyalty program
that the customer belongs to, and which is pre-determined in the Cash Customer
Data screen.
- Number of Points/ Currency/ Amount: In these fields, the system automatically
displays data, when the user clicks the Fetch Data button, depending on the entries
previously determined in the Master Data section. Otherwise, the user can fill in the
related fields manually. For example, in the Number Of Points column, the user can
enter the number of points added, deducted, or added as an opening balance, and

Enterprise Resource Planning 210 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

once done, the system will display the currency and the amount (value) of the points
balance based on the loyalty program setting configuration.
Remark: The system does not allow multiple opening balance
movements for the same customer account number.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 211 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Cash Customers Group

Use: This screen allows the organization to classify cash customers into similar groups and
benefit from the analytical data associated with this classification. This can be done based
on the adopted policies where cash customers are classified into wholesale-cash customers
group, and retail-cash customers group, based on the customers’ geolocations where cash
customers are classified into groups according to the province they reside in, or based on
the customer specialty where cash customers are classified into groups according to their
work field, such as food cash customers group, etc.

How to Use Screen:

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
- Group Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a serial number for the
group, which the user can modify after clicking the Add button.
- Group Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the cash customer group in the
system’s default language.
- Foreign Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the cash customer group in
the foreign language specified on the system.
- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 212 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Cash Customers Data

Use: In this screen, the user enters the cash customer-related data in the Master and
Detailed sections including the name, address, branch, available contact details, country,
governorate, region, related representative, and personal data. This helps the user handle
these customers if they are subscribed to a loyalty program or have earned discount
card(s), and also helps them use the cash customer name for reference in the cash sales
invoice under the sales system.

How to Use the Screen

To start working on this screen, users should click the Add button, then follow the steps as
instructed below:
First: Master Data
- Mobile Number: In this field, the user enters the customer's mobile number which will
be used as the customer number.
- Branch Number: In this field, the user selects the branch that the customer deals with
from the provided list.
- Customer Name: In this field, the user enters the name of the cash customer in the
default language of the system.
- Foreign Name: Here, the user enters the name of the cash customer in the foreign
language specified on the system.
- E-Mail: In this field, the user enters the e-mail address of the cash customer.
- Group: In this field, the user determines the group from the list of groups previously
defined in the Cash Customer Groups screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 213 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Loyalty Program Type: If the cash customer is a member in one of the existing
loyalty programs, then here, the user needs to determine which loyalty program this
customer belongs, provided that this specified program is valid so that it can be linked
to the customer.
- Activation Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the loyalty program
activation date once the user selects it in the Loyalty Program Type field.
- Send Verification Code/ Verification Code/ Verification: These fields appear when
the Send Verification Message upon Adding New Cash Customer parameter is
activated in the Customer Management System Parameters screen. They help the
user send a verification code to the customer to confirm their identity by entering this
sent code in the Customer Verification Code field for authentication.
Second: Main Data

- Discount Card Number: If the cash customer has subscription to discount cards, the
user needs to determine here the number of the discount card previously defined in the
Loyalty Cards screen under System Inputs provided that this discount card is valid so
that it could be linked to the customer.
- Address\ Phone Number\ Fax Number\ PO Box Number\ Zip Code\ Website\
Country\ Governorate\ City\ Region\ Representative Number\ Date of Birth\
Transaction Date: These are all optional fields that the user can fill in manually.
Third: Personal Data

Enterprise Resource Planning 214 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- ID Type/ Name: In the first column, the user determines the type of identity, and thus,
in the second column, the system displays the name of the selected identity.
- Issuance Date - AD/ Issuance Date - Hijri: In the first column, the user needs to
manually enter the ID card issuance date according to the Gregorian calendar, and
once done the system will display the Hijri date in the second column automatically.
- Expiry Date - AD/ Expiry Date - Hijri: In the first column, the user needs to
manually enter the ID card expiry date according to the Gregorian calendar, and once
done the system will display the Hijri expiry date automatically.
- Issuance Place: In this column, the user manually determines the place where the ID
card is issued.
Fourth: Other Data: In this tab, the user can create new fields that they may need to
display other customer-related data or information to use them later in reports. And,
whenever the user wants to rename these additional fields, they can do so using the Texts
Translation screen under the System General Configuration where they can open the
Customers Data and change the names of these fields by clicking the Modify button.

Fifth: Updating Information

This tab automatically displays the changes made to the loyalty program or the discount
cards once the user opens it.

Sixth: Addresses and IDs

In this tab, the user determines the customer address after clicking the button on the
screen, which then displays another screen including two tabs; one of which is used to add
the customer address directory and the other is used to add the IDs list, taking into

Enterprise Resource Planning 215 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

consideration that some of these data are determined by selection and the other some are
entered manually.

- Save: After completing data entry, the user should press save.

Enterprise Resource Planning 216 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Chapter Three System

Transactions

Enterprise Resource Planning 217 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Introduction
The system transactions are the activities and methods used in
processing the system inputs to obtain the various outputs. These
methods vary according to the objectives that the organization aims to.

Enterprise Resource Planning 218 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Notifications Requests

Use: On this screen, users configure the requests for the additional discounts that the
organization will give to the customer on the credit sales invoices. These discounts are
given at the level of invoice or item, provided that the discount does not exceed the invoice
value. Despite these discounts will result in increasing or decreasing customer debt,
notification requests have no impact until they are approved and fetched to the Customers
Notifications screen.
Remark: Any modification or deletion transaction carried on the
Customers Notifications Requests can be displayed on Auditing
Reports screen within the Information Management System when
activating the Documents with No Financial Impact option.

Screen Use Method

The screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the transaction will be
made.
- Request Type: In this field, users select the type of request from the list of notification
requests types.
- Request Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a modifiable
number for the request. The sequence of this number is based on the selected option
in the Customers Orders Sequence field within Customers System Parameters
screen, which can be Accumulative or By Type.

Enterprise Resource Planning 219 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Date: In this field, the date that appears can be Automatic Can Be Modified,
Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual according to the selected option in the
Show Date field on the Customers System Parameters screen.
- Discount Granting Method: In this field, users select one of the two discount
methods:
 By Invoice: When users select this option, the additional discount value will be
calculated at the invoice total amount level using the fields on the main data tab.
 By Item: When users select this option, the additional discount will be calculated at
each of the sales invoice items. Therefore, the fields related to calculating current
and previous discounts appear in the main and detailed data on the screen.
First: Request Discount for a Sales Invoice
- Payment Method: In this field, users select the payment method from the drop-down
list. This method is the one that was used in the sales invoice which will be corrected
or to which the additional discount will be added. This field includes the following
options:
 On Credit.
 Cash.
 To Account.
- Transaction Type: In this field, users determine the type of transaction by selecting
one of the following options:
 Additional Discount: Users select this option only when the discount is of the
credit type.
 Correction: When users select this option, a column for entering the modified price
appears. The difference between the invoice price and the modified one will be the
note amount. Consequently, the discount can be either debit or credit, and users
can choose either a credit account for the notification request such as a revenues
account, or a debit account, such as an allowed discount account.
- Note Type: In this field, users select Debit or Credit. By selecting the Debit option,
the customer account will be on the Debit side, and the sales revenue account will be
on credit side. Meanwhile, when users select the Credit option, the customer account
will be on the credit side and the sales revenue account will be debit.

Enterprise Resource Planning 220 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Hint: When users select the Correction option in the Transaction Type
field, the system allows selecting Debit or Credit options in the Note
Type field. Meanwhile, when users select the Additional Discount
option, the system allows selecting the Credit option only in the Note
Type field.
- Customer Number/ Name: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 to select
the required customer number. Consequently, the system will display the name in the
next field.
- Invoice Number: In this field, users press F9 to select the invoice number from the list
of sales invoices.
- Invoice Date/ Currency: In these fields, the system automatically displays the date
and currency of the invoice respectively.
- Invoice Amount: In this field, the system automatically displays the invoice amount
when users select the invoice.
- Previous Notes: In this field, the system automatically displays the previous discounts
given on the invoice if any.
- Note Percentage: In this field, users enter the percentage of the additional discount to
be decreased from the invoice value.
- Note Amount: In this field, the system displays the additional discount value, which
equals the net sales value multiplied by the additional discount percentage. Moreover,
users can manually enter the value of the additional discount and the additional
discount percentage will appear automatically.
- Net: In this field, the system displays the net amount after applying the additional
discount.
- Discount: In this field, the system displays the total discount applied to the sales
invoice upon issuance.
- Total Returns Amount: Here, the system displays the amount of the return if there is
a return for the invoice to which the additional discount applies.
- Tax and Charges: Here, the system displays any charges or taxes applied to the
sales invoice.
- Net Sales: Here, the system displays the net sales invoice after excluding the discount
given on the invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 221 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Reference Number: Here, users enter the reference number of the request that
includes digits, letters, or both. This field is optional and it can be mandatory when
users activate the Reference Number is Mandatory parameter on the Customers
System Parameters screen.
- Description: Here, users enter an explanatory description of the request.
- Tax Calculation Method: In this field, the tax calculation method of the sales invoice
appears automatically, which is the method used in the invoice.
- Account Number: This field appears if the discount type is at the invoice level.
Meanwhile, if the discount type is at the item level, the account number will be
determined according to the selected option in the Additional Discount by Item
Posting Method parameter. Therefore, when selecting the To Additional Discount
Account Selected in Screen option in the mentioned parameter, this field will appear
and users will determine the account to which the amount will be posted. If users
select the To Allowed Discount Account option, this field will not appear and the
discount will be posted to an allowed discount account defined on Link Stock
Accounts to General Ledger screen.
- Cost Center/ Activity Number/ Project: When users select the invoice, the system
automatically displays the cost center, project, and/or activity number if they are used
upon issuing the invoice.
- Representative Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the related
representative if the invoice is linked to a specific one.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.
Second: Request Additional Discount for an Item
When users give additional discounts on an item, they will fill in the master data section as
in giving a discount on the invoice. Note that when selecting this method, some fields
related to the invoice and previous discounts disappear from the master section and appear
as columns in the detailed data section at the item level.
Detailed Data Fields: When users select the invoice number in the Invoice Number field in
the master data, the system displays its data in detailed data section automatically, including
the Item Number, Item Name, Unit, Invoice Quantity, Price, Discount, Charges, Value,
Discount Quantity, and Previous Notes, if any.

Enterprise Resource Planning 222 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Note Percentage: In this column, users manually enter the percentage of the
additional discount applied to the invoice for each item.
- Total Note Amount: In this column, the system displays the discount amount
automatically (the result of multiplying additional discount percentage x item value).
- Price After Note: In this column, the system automatically displays the price of a
single item unit after the discount after calculating it as follows:
1 Subtract previous discounts from the unit price in invoice to get net previous price
2 Multiply the net previous price by the percentage of required additional discount to
get the amount of the additional discount
3 Subtract the additional discount amount from the net previous price to get the net
price of the single item unit after the additional discount
- Net: In this column, the system displays the net value of the sales invoice after
discounts, which equals the result of multiplying the price after the discount calculated
in the previous field by the number of items.
Third: Additional Data
In this tab, users enter any additional data to the notification’s requests noting that the
name of these fields can be modified using the Texts Translation screen.

Fourth: Tax
In this tab, the system automatically displays the calculated tax on the item. On the right
side, the system displays the tax type, tax percentage, tax authority, and tax amount. On
the left side, the system displays the tax data at the item level.

- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

- Approve Requests: In order to implement the additional discount request for sales
invoices, it requires to be approved by the authorized user by clicking on the Approve
button on the toolbar at the top of the screen. Consequently, the screen below appears

Enterprise Resource Planning 223 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

and the authorized user changes the approval status from Unapproved to Approved
and then, saves the transaction.

Enterprise Resource Planning 224 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Notifications
Use: On this screen, users can apply the additional discounts that the organization will give
to customers on future sales invoices for any reason. These discounts can decrease or
increase the customer’s debt, and they are given at the level of invoice or item, provided
that they do not exceed the invoice value. Despite these discounts do not affect the stock,
they affect the customer account or cash account based on the payment method in the
invoice, they also may affect an intermediary account as needed by the user.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the transaction will be
made.
- Type: In this field, users select the discount type from the types list.
- Voucher Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a modifiable
number for the discount voucher and its sequence is determined according to the
selected option in the Customers Requests Sequence parameter on the parameters
screen. Therefore, when selecting Accumulative, the system generates an
accumulative sequence for the vouchers. Meanwhile, when selecting By Type, the
system generates a separate sequence for each type.
- Date: In this field, the document date automatically appears according to the selected
option in the Show Date parameter on the parameters screen; which can be
Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual. The

Enterprise Resource Planning 225 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

discount date cannot be less than the invoice date; otherwise, the following alert
message appears to the user; “Document date is less than invoice date.”

- Discount Granting Method: This field includes two discount methods as follows:
 By Invoice: When users select this option, the additional discount value will be
calculated at the invoice total amount level using the fields on the main data tab.
 By Item: When users select this option, the additional discount will be calculated at
each of the sales invoice items. Therefore, the fields related to calculating current
and previous discounts appear in the main and detailed data on the screen.
- Linking Method: In this field, users determine whether to apply the discount on an
invoice issued during the current year or from the previous one(s). By selecting From
Previous Year option, Year field will appear and users enter the year during which the
invoice was issued.
- Fetch from Discount Request: In this field, users select the request that will be
fetched, provided that it was already approved by the authorized person(s).
Consequently, the request details appear on the screen, and users can modify them
(for example, modifying discount percentage or amount).
First: Discount for a Sales Invoice
- Payment Method: In this field, users select the payment method from the drop-down
list. This method is the one that was used in the sales invoice which will be corrected
or to which the additional discount will be added. This field includes the following
options:
 On Credit.
 Cash.
 To Account.
- Transaction Type: In this field, users determine the type of transaction by selecting
one of the following options:

Enterprise Resource Planning 226 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Additional Discount: Users select this option only when the discount is of the
credit type.
 Correction: When users select this option, a column for entering the modified price
appears. The difference between the invoice price and the modified one will be the
note amount. Consequently, the discount can be either debit or credit, and users
can choose either a credit account for the notification request such as a revenues
account, or a debit account, such as an allowed discount account.
- Note Type: In this field, users select Debit or Credit. By selecting the Debit option,
the customer account will be on the Credit side. Meanwhile, when users select the
Credit option, the customer account will be on the debit side.
Hint: When users select the Correction option in the Transaction Type
field, the system allows selecting Debit or Credit options in the Note
Type field. Meanwhile, when users select the Additional Discount
option, the system allows selecting the Credit option only in the Note
Type field.
- Customer Number: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 to select the
required customer number.
- Customer Name: In this field, the system displays the customer's name automatically
as soon as users select the customer number.
- Invoice Number: In this field, users press F9 to select the invoice number from the list
of sales invoices.
- Invoice Date/ Currency: In these fields, the system automatically displays the date
and currency of the invoice respectively.
- Invoice Amount: In this field, the system automatically displays the invoice amount
when users select the invoice.
- Previous Notes: In this field, the system automatically displays the previous discounts
given on the invoice if any.
- Note Percentage: In this field, users enter the percentage of the additional discount to
be decreased from the invoice value.
- Note Amount: In this field, the system displays the additional discount value, which
equals the net sales value multiplied by the additional discount percentage. Moreover,

Enterprise Resource Planning 227 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

users can manually enter the value of the additional discount and the additional
discount percentage will appear automatically.
- Net: In this field, the system displays the net amount after applying the additional
discount.
- Discount: In this field, the system displays the total discount applied to the sales
invoice upon issuance.
- Total Returns Amount: Here, the system displays the amount of the return if there is
a return for the invoice to which the additional discount applies.
- Tax and Charges: Here, the system displays any charges or taxes applied to the
sales invoice.
- Net Sales: Here, the system displays the net sales invoice after excluding the discount
given on the invoice.
- Reference Number: Here, users enter the reference number of the notification that
includes digits, letters, or both. This field is optional and it can be mandatory when
users activate the Reference Number is Mandatory parameter on the Customers
System Parameters screen.
- Description: Here, users enter an explanatory description of the discount.
- Account Number: This field appears if the discount type is at the invoice level.
Meanwhile, if the discount type is at the item level, the account number will be
determined according to the selected option in the Additional Discount by Item
Posting Method parameter. Therefore, when selecting the To Additional Discount
Account Selected in Screen option in the mentioned parameter, this field will appear
and users will determine the account to which the amount will be posted. If users
select the To Allowed Discount Account option, this field will not appear and the
discount will be posted to an allowed discount account defined on Link Stock
Accounts to General Ledger screen.
- Cost Center/ Activity Number/ Project: When users select the invoice, the system
automatically displays the cost center, project, and/or activity number if they are used
upon issuing the invoice.
- Tax Calculation Method: In this field, the tax calculation method of the sales invoice
appears automatically, which is the method used in the invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 228 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Representative Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the related
representative if the invoice is linked to a specific one.
- Beneficiary Branch: In this field, users select the beneficiary branch from the list.
Consequently, the system will automatically mediate the branches current account
entered in the Intermediary Accounts screen.
Second: Additional Discount for an Item
When users give additional discounts on an item, they will fill in the master data section as
in giving a discount on the invoice. Note that when selecting this method, some fields
related to the invoice and previous discounts disappear from the master section and appear
as columns in the detailed data section at the item level.
- Detailed Data Fields: When users select the invoice number in the Invoice Number
field in the master data, the system displays its data in detailed data section
automatically, including the Item Number, Item Name, Unit, Invoice Quantity, Price,
Discount, Charges, Value, Discount Quantity, and Previous Notes, if any.
- Note Percentage: In this column, users manually enter the percentage of the
additional discount applied to the invoice for each item.
- Total Note Amount: In this column, the system displays the discount amount
automatically (the result of multiplying additional discount percentage x item value).
- Price After Note: In this column, the system automatically displays the price of a
single item unit after the discount after calculating it as follows:
1 Subtract previous discounts from the unit price in invoice to get net previous price
2 Multiply the net previous price by the percentage of required additional discount to
get the amount of the additional discount
3 Subtract the additional discount amount from the net previous price to get the net
price of the single item unit after the additional discount
- Net: In this column, the system displays the net value of the sales invoice after
discounts, which equals the result of multiplying the price after the discount calculated
in the previous field by the number of items.
Third: Additional Data
In this tab, users enter any additional data to the notification’s requests noting that the
name of these fields can be modified using the Texts Translation screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 229 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Fourth: Tax
In this tab, the system automatically displays the calculated tax on the item. On the left side,
the system displays the tax type, tax percentage, tax authority, and tax amount. On the right
side, the system displays the tax data for the item.

- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 230 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customer Notifications - Multi

Use: This screen allows users to apply multiple additional discounts to more than one
customer’s sales invoice for any reason. These discounts can either decrease or increase
the customer’s debt and they are applied only at the invoice level, not to individual items.

How to use the screen

This screen is used after clicking the Add button as follows:
First: Master Data
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the discount will be
applied.
- Discount Type: In this field, the system displays only the By Invoice option, so the
discount on this screen is given on the invoice, not on the items.
- Type: In this field, the user selects the discount type from the list of types added to the
Notes Types screen within the Customer System Setup.
- Tax Calculation Method: In this field, the system automatically displays the default
method of calculating the tax, which changes according to the calculation method
linked to the customer when selecting the customer.
- Voucher Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a modifiable
discount voucher number when selecting the Automatic Can Be Modified or Manual
option in the Document Sequence parameter on the Customer System Parameters
screen. Moreover, users can determine the sequence mechanism in the Customer
System Parameters screen by selecting one of the following options:

Enterprise Resource Planning 231 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

 Accumulative: When users select this option, the sequence will be accumulative
for all discounts.
 By Type: When users select this option, each discount type will have a separate
sequence.
 General: When users select this option, the system generates accumulative
sequences. It should be noted that users select this option only when using
electronic invoices.
- Date: In this field, the date appears automatically, which can be Automatic Can Be
Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual according to the selected
option in the Show Date parameter on the parameters screen.
- Payment Method: In this field, users select the payment method from the drop-down
list. This method is the one that was used in the sales invoice to which the additional
discount will be added. This field includes the following options:
 On Credit.
 Cash.
 To Account.
- Cash Number: This field appears when selecting the Cash option in the Payment
Method field. In this field, users select the cash that will be used in the multiple
notifications.
- Customer Number/ Name: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 to select
the customer number from the customers' list. Consequently, the system automatically
displays the customer’s name in the Customer Name field.
- Currency: In this field, the currency of the customer account appears automatically if it
was only, otherwise, users will need to select the required currency from the drop-
down list.
- Description: In this field, users enter an explanatory description of the transaction.
- Reference Number: In this field, users enter the reference number of the note, which
can be digits or letters. This field is optional and it can be mandatory when activating
the Reference Number is Mandatory parameter on the parameters screen.
- Account Number: This field appears if the selected option in the Additional Discount
by Item Posting Method parameter is To Additional Discount Account Selected in

Enterprise Resource Planning 232 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Screen, and it is used to determine the account that will be on the debit side in the
discount transaction. Meanwhile, if users select the To Allowed Discount Account
option in the previously mentioned parameter, this field will not appear and the discount
will be posted to an allowed discount account defined on Link Stock Accounts to
General Ledger screen.
- From Date/ To Date: In these fields, users enter the period within which the system
will display the sales invoices when clicking on the Fetch Data button. If the period is
not determined and users clicked on the Fetch Data button, the system displays all
sales invoices related to the customer specified in the Customer Number field.
- Note Percentage: In this field, users enter the discount percentage that will be
approved for all invoices that will be fetched to the detailed data. If no percentage is
specified in this field, the note percentage will be entered for each invoice separately.
- Note Type: In this field, the system displays Credit type and it cannot be modified,
which indicates that the discount will affect the credit side only of the customer's
account.
- Fetch Data: Users click this button to fetch the invoices to the detailed data after filling
in the master data.
- Select Specific Invoices: Users click on this button to select specific sales invoices to
be fetched to approve the discounts applied to them. When users click on this button,
a screen pops up on which users tick the flag next to each invoice that users want to
fetch.
Second: Main Data
After clicking on the Fetch Data button, the system displays here the data of the fetched
invoices, for which the additional discounts are approved. In this tab, users also determine
the discount percentage or discount amount for each invoice if it is not entered in the Note
Percentage field in the master data. It should be noted that users can delete any
mistakenly selected invoice by clicking the right mouse button and selecting the Delete
Record option.
Hint: The document number appears in the first column of this tab. This
number is the transaction number that will be saved in the Additional
Discounts screen, as the discount of each invoice is saved in a
separate document.

Enterprise Resource Planning 233 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Third: Detailed Data

The data of this tab appear automatically after clicking on the Fetch Data button. Here, the
system displays the items of the invoice selected in the Master Data tab.

Fourth: Additional Data

In this tab, users enter any additional notification data that is required and not included in
the rest of the screen tabs. Users can rename these fields whenever needed using the
Texts Translation screen in the system’s general configuration.

Fifth: Fetching Options

In this tab, users filter the data by pressing F9 or selecting an option from the list in the
included fields. Then, users click on the Fetch Data button and the data will be fetched to
the detailed data section.

Enterprise Resource Planning 234 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Request Granting Compensation Quantity

Use: On this screen, users fill requests for granting the customer compensation (free of
charge) quantities based on the policy determined in the Customer Data screen to be
fetched in the sales invoice. The compensation quantities are the quantities (bonus) given to
the customer as an incentive when they sell a certain volume of the organization’s items.

Screen Use Method

First: Master Data
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the compensation quantity
grant request will be submitted.
- Document Number/ Date: In these fields, the system displays the document number
and date automatically with the possibility of modification.
- From Date/ To Date: In these fields, users determine the period within which the sales
invoices –for which the compensation quantities (bonus) will be calculated– were
issued.
- Customer Number: In this field, users manually enter the number of the customer for
whom the compensation quantities will be calculated or select it after pressing F9.
- Policy Type: This field is used according to the selected customer number in the
previous field. In this field, only the compensation quantities policies –linked to the
customer in the Customers Data screen– appear.
- Reference Number: In this field, users enter the reference number of the request.
- Description: In this field, users enter a clarifying statement for the request.

Enterprise Resource Planning 235 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Approved: In this field, the status of approval appears automatically according to the
option selected for approving the request in the toolbar; which can be Unapproved,
Approved, Rejected, or Return.
- Used: This flag appears automatically ticked to indicate that request is used in the
sales invoice.
- Suspend: Users tick this flag to suspend granting compensation quantities temporarily
for any reason. Consequently, users can save the request without fetching it into the
invoice unless the suspension is ended.
- Do Not Return It in Returns: This flag appears ticked for the requests of the
customer’s compensatory quantities that cannot be returned following the active
compensatory quantities policy since compensatory quantities are returned in the sales
returns by default.
- Fetch Data: After entering the master data of the request, users click this button to
fetch the result of calculating the compensation quantities to the detailed data based on
the selected compensation policy. If the policy conditions for calculating the
compensatory quantities are not met, an alert message appears and indicating “There
are no data according to the selected conditions.”
Second: Detailed Data
The columns in the detailed data change according to the selected compensation quantities
policy in the master data. These columns display the details of the compensatory quantities
that will be granted to the customer following the compensatory policy.

Third: Show Invoices

This tab displays the sales invoices issued during the period specified in the master data
and used in calculating the customer's compensating quantities.

Fourth: Fetch Data

Users click on this button when the compensation quantities are calculated from specific
documents such as:

Enterprise Resource Planning 236 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Sales Invoice/ Customer Request: Users can calculate the customer’s compensation
quantities on a sales invoice or specific customer request by selecting the customer
and the compensation policy, then, determining the invoice or request, and fetching the
data. Consequently, the compensation quantities on the selected sales invoice or
customer request will appear in the detailed data section.
- Compensation Customer Request: To display this flag, users need to add a type in
the Customer Requests Types screen and activate the Request Compensating
Quantities flag for it. Then, users need to select this type when filling in the
customer’s request by entering the compensation quantities in the Free of Charge
column. When using this type in the customer's requests screen, the system does not
allow users to enter the quantity in the Quantity column. After saving and approving
the compensation quantity request for the customer, users fetch the request to the
Request Granting Compensation Quantity screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 237 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Due Sales Invoices

Use: This screen is used to render the effect of the due sales invoices of the payment
method (network), whether these invoices were issued from the POS or the Onyx Sales
system. Consequently, the system creates an accounting entry in which the organization’s
bank account appears on Debit side instead of the intermediary account that was used in
the selling transaction.

Screen Use Method

- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the invoice effect will
be rendered.
- Type: In this field, users select the appropriate option for the transaction from the
following:
 All: Users select this option to handle all invoices (posted and unposted).
 Unposted: Users select this option to handle unposted invoices only.
 Posting: Users select this option to handle the posted invoices only.
- POS System: This flag appears automatically activated for the invoices issued by the
POS system.
- From Date/ To Date: In these fields, users define the period during which the sales
invoices are due so the system displays them.
- Payment Card Type: In this field, users select the type of payment card from the ones
defined in the Payment Card Types screen in the Customers Management System
configuration.

Enterprise Resource Planning 238 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Card Type: In this field, users select the type of credit card from the ones defined in
the Credit Card Types screen within the Customers Management System
configuration.
- From Invoice Number/ To: In these fields, users determine the range of invoices
numbers that need to be displayed on the screen.
- Warehouse Number/ To: In these fields, users determine the range of the
warehouses from which the invoices were issued.
- Fetch Data: When users click on this button, the system displays the data of the
detailed data fields.
- Due: Users click on the Modify button, and then select one of the following options:
 Under Collection: Users select this option for due invoices that are still under
collection and appear every time users display them until they are collected.
 Due: Users select this option for invoices that due. Consequently, the system
creates the following accounting entry:
Entry Debit Credit
From/ Bank Account x
To/ Notes Receivable (the intermediary account defined
in the Credit Cards Data screen within the Customers x
Management System configuration.)
 Delayed: Users select this option to postpone the invoices’ due dates to a new
date that will be determined in the Due Date column.
- Display Visa Documents: When users click on this button on the toolbar, the system
displays a screen on which users can view the due visa documents and select the
required one to be fetched. Note that users can move to the document by clicking on
the Arrow button next to each document. Moreover, users can delete any visa on the
Display Visa Documents screen by clicking on the Delete button next to the required
document.

- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 239 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Settle Customers Installments

Use: On this screen, users settle installments manually by distributing the amounts received
from customers among the debit balances charged to them according to the organization's
records. This is done by matching each paid amount with its corresponding debit balance.
For example, a customer –who owes 1,000,000 dollars to the organization (400,000 dollars
as an opening balance and 600,000 dollars for three sales invoices at 200,000 dollars
each)– paid 400,000 dollars by check. Then, on this screen, users manually recorded the
400,000 dollars as payments for the first and third sales invoices. Consequently, the
opening balance and the second invoice will not be affected.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Master Data
Here, users record the data of the document credited to the customer at the organization,
such as receipt voucher, sales returns, customer notification, journal entry (when settling
customer debt), or opening balance (when the balance is credit). This section includes the
following fields:
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the customer’s
installments will be settled.
- Sequence: In this field, the system automatically generates a modifiable serial number.
- Date: In this field, the document date appears according to the selected option in the
Show Date parameter within the system parameters screen, which can be Automatic
Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.

Enterprise Resource Planning 240 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Customer Number/ Name: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 to select
the customer number from a list. Consequently, the customer's name appears.
- Currency: In this field, users select the currency, which is used in customer's account
and in which the installments will be settled, from the list.
- Document Type: In this field, users select the type of document –which has been
recorded in the customer's credit account– from the following options; Opening
Balance, Receipt Voucher, Sales Return Invoice, Journal Entry, or Goods Out
Order.
Hint: When customers’ payments are recorded manually, and then the
customer returns items, the system automatically settles the installment
once the invoice number is selected. In other words, the settlement is
made for the selected invoice once the return is saved without using the
Settle Customers Installments screen and selecting Sales Return in
Document Type field.
- Document Number: In this field, users select the number of documents that will be
used to make one settlement or more.
- Document Date: In this field, the system displays the document date automatically
once selecting the document.
- Amount: When users select the required document, the system displays the document
amount automatically in this field.
- Remaining Amount: In this field, the system displays the amount that has not been
distributed from the document in selected the previous Document Number field. If the
document amount is entirely distributed, the remaining amount will be zero.
- Reference Number: In this field, users record the reference number of the transaction.
This field becomes mandatory when activating the Reference Number is Mandatory
parameter in the parameters screen.
- Description: In this field, users enter a clarifying statement of the transaction. This
field becomes mandatory when activating the Description is Mandatory parameter in
the parameters screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 241 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Second: Detailed Data

In the detailed data section, users determine the debited documents that will be settled and
among which the credit amounts will be distributed. These documents can be a payment
voucher, sales invoice, journal entry (when settling customer debt), opening balance (when
balance is debit), goods out order, or debt scheduling. This section includes the following
columns:
- Document Type: In this column, users determine the type of document charged on the
customer and will be settled or its installments will be settled.
- Document Number: In this column, users press F9 to select the number of the
document that will be settled.
- Installment Number: In this column, the system automatically displays the installment
that will be settled –if there is more than one– with the possibility to be modified.
- Due Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the installment due date.
- Amount: In this column, the system automatically displays the document amount when
users select a specific document number.
- Paid Amount: This field displays the total amount that has been settled in previous
settlement transactions.
- Settlement Amount: In this column, users enter the amount of the document that will
be settled.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 242 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Promissory Note
Use: This screen appears when activating the Use Promissory Notes parameter on the
General Ledger Parameters screen. Promissory note is a written promise to pay a certain
amount and it includes the parties (entities and individuals) of the sales transactions. It
should be noted that the sales invoice can be divided into multiple promissory notes that are
paid at due dates determined by the user. Moreover, promissory notes recorded on this
screen do not have a financial effect.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Master Data
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the transaction will be
made.
- Invoice Number: In this field, users press F9 to select the sales invoice for which the
promissory note(s) will be issued.
- Invoice Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the invoice date and it
cannot be modified.
- Invoice Amount: In this field, the system automatically displays the invoice amount
and it cannot be modified.
- Currency: In this field, the system automatically displays the currency of the sales
invoice.
- Account Number/ Name: In these fields, the system automatically displays the
customer's account number and name when users select the invoice.

Enterprise Resource Planning 243 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Number of Promissory Notes: In this field, users enter the number of promissory
notes. Consequently, the system divides the amount of the promissory note by the
entered number, and each promissory note is given its number and date.
- Number of Installment Days: In this field, users enter the number of days for the
installments. So, the system automatically records the due dates for each installment in
the details data section based on the number of issued promissory notes. For example,
if the number of the issued promissory notes is 4 and the number of installment days is
5, the system will record 4 due dates and the period between the due dates will be 5
days.
- Divide Amount Evenly: When users tick this flag, the amount of the promissory note
will be divided evenly among the number of issued promissory notes. Otherwise, users
will need to enter the amounts manually.
- Warehouse Number: This field appears when the Use Multiple Warehouses
parameter is not activated on the parameters screen, and it displays the number of
warehouses recorded in the sales invoice selected in the Invoice Number field.
- Center Number: In this field, users link the promissory note to the center if any.
- Fetch Data: When users click on this button, the system fetches all the data of the
promissory notes and due dates in the detailed data screen.
Second: Detailed Data
Once users click on the Fetch Data button, after filling in the required data in the master
data, the system automatically displays the detailed data in this section. Moreover, the data
of the detailed data fields can be entered manually as follows:
- S/N: In this column, the system automatically displays a modifiable automatic
sequence.
- Promissory Note Number: In this column, users manually enter the number of each
promissory note based on the number of promissory notes that will be issued for the
invoice.
- Invoice Number: In this column, users press F9 to select the number of the sales
invoice for which the promissory note(s) will be issued. Note that the invoice can be
replicated for more than a promissory note, if the invoice needs many.
- Currency: Once the invoice is selected, the system automatically displays the currency
of it in this column, and it cannot be changed.

Enterprise Resource Planning 244 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Invoice Amount: In this column, the system automatically displays the invoice value.
- Promissory Note Amount: This column displays the promissory note amount which
can be the invoice amount or part of it if the invoice amount is divided into more than
one.
- Due Date: In this column, users enter the due date manually, which is the payment
date of the promissory note.
- Remarks: In this column, users enter any remarks at each promissory note level if
needed.
- Warehouse Number/ Center Number/ Customer Number/ Customer Name: The
data of these fields appear automatically.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.
- Promissory Note Movement: When users click this button next to any promissory
note, the corresponding payment movement appears.

Enterprise Resource Planning 245 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Settling Promissory Notes

Use: This screen appears when users activate the Use Promissory Notes parameter on
the General Ledger Parameters screen. This screen is used to distribute the amounts
received from (or accrued to) customers –based on opening balance (if it is credit), journal
entries, customers credit settlements, receipt voucher, sales return invoice, incoming order,
or customers notifications– among the issued promissory note(s) by linking each paid
amount to its promissory note(s).

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which the promissory note will
be settled.
- Settlement Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a modifiable
number for the settlement.
- Date: This field displays the date of entering the promissory note settlement data. This
date can be Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or
Manual according to the selected option in the Show Date field on the parameters
screen.
- Customer Number/ Name: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 and select
the number of the customer. Consequently, the name appears in the Customer Name
field.
- Document Type: In this field, users select the type of credit document that will be
used to settle the promissory note. The document can be Opening Balance, Journal

Enterprise Resource Planning 246 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Entry, Receipt Voucher, Sales Return Invoice, Goods Out Order, or Customers
Notifications.
- Document Number: In this field, users press F9 and select the document number for
the selected document type.
- Document Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the date of the
selected document and it cannot be changed.
- Document Amount: In this field, the system displays the amount of the credit
document that will be used to settle the promissory note.
- Currency: In this field, the currency used in the document appears automatically.
- Cost Center: In this field, the system automatically displays the cost center that is
linked to the document.
- Promissory Note Number: In this field, users press F9 to select the number of the
promissory note that will be settled.
- Currency: When users select the number of the promissory, the system automatically
displays its currency in this field.
- Promissory Note Amount: In this field, the system displays the amount of the
promissory note that will be settled.
- Due Date: In this field, the system displays the due date of the promissory note
entered on the Promissory Note screen.
- Paid Amount: This field displays the previously settled amount of the selected
promissory note. It should be noted that no data appear here when settling the value
of the promissory note for the first time.
- Amount: In this field, users enter the document amount that will be used to settle the
promissory note fully or partially.
- Remaining Amount: In this field, the amount of the promissory note that has not been
paid appears.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 247 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Indebtedness Scheduling
Use: This screen appears when users activate the Pay Installments Manually parameter
on the Customers Management System Parameters screen. This parameter cannot be
activated if the Use Promissory Notes parameter is activated on the General Ledger
Parameters screen. This screen is used to reschedule the customer’s debts or some of
them, in order to be paid to the organization in installments with new dates. Debt scheduling
is considered an acquaintance of the customer debts.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Master Data
- Branch Number: In this field, users select the branch in which customers' debts will
be rescheduled.
- Debt Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a modifiable debt
number.
- Date: This field displays the date of the indebtedness scheduling. This date can be
Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual, according
to the selected option in the Show Date parameter on the system parameters screen.
- Customer Number/ Name: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 to select
the customer number. Consequently, the Customer Name appears automatically in the
Customer Name field.
- Currency: In this field, users select the currency of the movements that will be
scheduled.

Enterprise Resource Planning 248 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- From Date/ To Date: In these fields, users enter the start and end dates of the
indebtedness that will be rescheduled.
- Cost Center: In this field, users select the related cost center from the list.
- Selected Movements: This part includes the flags of Opening Balance, Sales
Invoices, Journal Entries, Payment Vouchers, Goods Out Orders, and
Indebtedness Scheduling. Ticking any flag includes it in the indebtedness that will be
scheduled.
- Fetch Data: When users click this button, the system automatically displays all data
related to the customer's indebtedness that will be scheduled in the detailed data (1)
section based on the selected movements.
Second: Detailed data (1)
In this section, the system automatically displays the data of Document Number,
Document Type, Document Date, Currency, Amount, and Local Amount, based on the
data of the indebtedness documents. These data cannot be modified; however, users can
exclude some invoices or invoice items by deleting them from the detailed data.
Third: Detailed data (2)
In this section, users enter the number of installments of the indebtedness documents that
were displayed in the detailed data (1) and determine the payment dates and the number of
days for each installment. This section includes the following:
- Number of Installments: In this field, users enter the number of installments that the
customer will pay according to the indebtedness scheduling.
- Currency: In this field, users select the currency in which the installment will be paid
from the list of currencies.
- Number of Installment Days: In this field, users enter the number of days (period)
between installments. For example, if users entered 15 in this field, the date of the
second payment of the installment comes after 15 days from the first one, and so on.
- Divide Amount Evenly: When users tick this flag, the system will divide the amount of
the customer’s scheduled indebtedness into installments of equal amounts with the
possibility of modification. When this flag is not ticked, users enter the installment
amount manually as agreed with the customer.

Enterprise Resource Planning 249 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Distribute: When users click on this button, the system displays the number of
installments, and each installment date, amount in the specified currency, and in local
currency. The system also allows users to enter installments directly without filling in
the previous fields.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 250 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Invoice Follow-up

Use: Some organizations need to closely follow up on invoices they send to contracted
health insurers as these invoices can be issued with significant amounts of money that need
to be collected on time. This screen allows tracking sales invoices of the insurers, as well
as any other sales invoice. The follow-up process starts with coding its phases using the
Customers Management System General Codings screen within the system
configuration, then uses this screen, goes to Customer Claims screen, and ends with the
Follow-up Customers Claims screen. Note that the sales invoices that are matched on
this screen can be moved to the Customers Claims screen when users activate the Sales
Invoices Follow-up parameter.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used by filling in the fields in both Options and Advanced Options tabs to
filter the required data.
First: Master Data
The main fields of these section will be explained below as follows:
- Sort By: In this field, users select one of two options: Customer Number or Invoice
Number, and accordingly the detailed data appears.
- Display Unmatched Documents Only/ Display Matched Documents: Selecting one
of these two options allows displaying either the matched or the unmatched
documents, but by not selecting any, the system displays both the matched and
unmatched documents in the detailed data.

Enterprise Resource Planning 251 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Second: Detailed Data

After filling in the master data fields in both Options and Advanced Options tabs and
clicking on Fetch Data button, the system displays the detailed data section that needs to
be handled as follows:
From Invoice Number to Phase Name columns: The data of these columns automatically
appear based on the data determined by the user in the Options and Advanced Options
tabs.
- Match Status: In this column, users select an option from the list after clicking on the
Modify button. Note that the system displays the Unmatched option in this column by
default for the first phase of the follow-up process and it can be changed. Moreover,
the system prevents matching a phase until the previous one is matched, and displays
an alert message saying “Must match previous phases”. This allows users to follow
up on the different phases in an effective way.
- Description: In this column, users enter a statement on the different statuses
(matched, unmatched, or return).
- Match User/ User Name/ Matching Date: The system displays these columns’ data
automatically for information only.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 252 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Claims
Use: This screen appears when users activate the Use Customer Claims parameter on the
system parameters screen. This screen is used to issue claims for customers to repay the
sales invoices that have been issued and matched on the Sales Invoices Follow-up
screen. The claim contains the basic invoice data, and the insurance fields appear when
users activate the Use Medical Insurance System parameter on the Customers
Management System Parameters screen.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Master Data
- Document Number: In this field, the system automatically generates a modifiable
number for the document.
- Document Date: In this field, the system displays the date of the claim document. This
date can be Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or
Manual according to the selected option in the Show Date parameter on the system
parameters screen.
- Customer Number/ Name: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 to select
the required customer number that will pay from the list. Consequently, the customer’s
name appears in the Customer Name field.
- Currency: In this field, users select the currency in which the customer claim will be
made according to the currency used in the issued invoices.

Enterprise Resource Planning 253 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- From Date/ To Date: In these fields, users determine the period of the invoices for
which the claim will be issued.
- Reference Number: In this field, users manually enter the reference number, which
can be digits or letters and it can be a manual document number or file number. The
organization uses this number for archiving purposes to refer back to it whenever
needed.
- Description: In this field, the user manually enters a clear description of the claim
including the content sent to the entity or any other data can be used upon auditing.
- Used: This flag appears ticked if the claim has been fetched to a receipt voucher.
- Fetch Data: When the users click on this button, the system displays all invoices
issued during the specified period and in the selected currency.
Second: Detailed Data
Once users click on the Fetch Data button in the master data section, the system
automatically displays the data of this section which include the following:
- Document Number: In this column, the system displays the document number that
was issued (sales invoice number).
- Document Type: In this column, the system displays the type of the issued document
(sales invoice type).
- Document Date: In this column, the system displays the issuance date of the sales
invoice document.
- Member Name: In this column, the subscriber (beneficiary) name appears from the
sales invoice.
- Insurance Number: In this column, the insurance number of the member appears
according to the entered data in the Insured Data screen
- Representative Number/ Representative Name/ Authority Number/ Authority
Name/ Network Number/ Network Name/ Approval Code: These columns appear
when users activate the Use Medical Insurance System parameter on the Customers
Management System Parameters screen. The system displays the data of these
columns automatically.
- Invoice Total: In this column, the system displays the net sales invoice after returns or
discounts, if there were any in the sales invoice document.

Enterprise Resource Planning 254 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Contribution Amount: In this column, the system displays the amount paid by the
beneficiary as a contribution to the insurance value.
- Limit Discrepancy: In this column, the system displays the amount that exceeds the
approved insurance limit for the beneficiary, note that these amounts are paid by the
beneficiary.
- Charges: In this column, the system displays the charges that have been added to the
sales invoice.
- Tax: In this column, the system displays the tax that has been added to the sales
invoice.
- Discount: This column displays the discounts –determined in the Insurer Data
screen– that have been given to the insurers from the entity that issued the sales
invoice.
- Net Amount: In this column, the system displays the net amount of the invoice that
the insurer needs to pay to the organization.
- Total: In this column, the system displays the total claim amount for all the invoices
included in the request.
Third: Follow Up
In this tab the user manually documents the visits made by the collector to the insurance
company.

Claim Approval: When users click on the Approval button on the taskbar, the system
displays the approval screen to be used by users according to the privilege granted to them.
It should be noted that when users approve the claim, they can follow it up on the Follow-
up Customers Claims screen and they can also fetch the claim in a receipt voucher.
Fourth: Installments Data
When users activate the Use Customers Claim parameter, Accruals Type field appears
on the Customers Data screen, in which, users select one of two options per customer: By
Invoice or By Claim. By selecting By Claim the Installment Data tab will be used on this

Enterprise Resource Planning 255 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

screen but not on the Sales Invoices screen. In this tab, users enter the installments’ data
of the claim, if used, on the left side of the screen, so the system automatically distributes
the installments on the right side. This tab includes the following:

- Number of Installments: In this field, users enter the number of installments by which
the claim amount is divided.
- Number of Installment Days: In this field, users enter the number of installment days,
consequently, the system determines the installment dates. For example, when users
enter number 5 in this field, the system sets the payment date of the next installment
after 5 days starting from the previous installment, with the possibility of modification.
- First Installment Date: In this field, users enter the date of the first installment to be
the basis for setting the dates of the following installments based on the number of
installment days.
- Divide Amount Evenly: In this field, users enter the invoice amount to be distributed
evenly among the number of installments, with the possibility of modification.
- First Installment Amount: In this field, users enter the amount of the first installment
and the system distributes the rest of the invoice amount among the rest of the
installments.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 256 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Follow Up Insurers Claims

Use: On this screen, users can follow up on customer claims approved in the Customers
Claims screen to ensure the implementation of the follow-up phases of customer claims.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used by filling in the fields in both Options and Advanced Options tabs to
filter the required data.
First: Master Data
The main fields of this section will be explained below as follows:
- Sort By: In this field, users select one of two options: Customer Number or Invoice
Number, and accordingly the detailed data appears.
- Display Unmatched Documents Only/ Display Matched Documents: Selecting one
of these two options allows displaying either the matched or the unmatched
documents, but by not selecting any, the system displays both the matched and
unmatched documents in the detailed data.
Second: Detailed Data
After filling in the master data fields in both Options and Advanced Options tabs and
clicking on Fetch Data button, the system displays the detailed data section that needs to
be handled as follows:
- From Invoice Number to Phase Name columns: The data of these columns
automatically appear based on the data determined by the user in the Options and
Advanced Options tabs.

Enterprise Resource Planning 257 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Match Status: In this column, users select an option from the list after clicking on the
Modify button. Note that the system displays the Unmatched option in this column by
default for the first phase of the follow-up process and it can be changed. Moreover,
the system prevents matching a phase until the previous one is matched, and displays
an alert message saying “Must match previous phases”. This allows users to follow
up on the different phases in an effective way.
- Description: In this column, users enter a statement on the different statuses
(matched, unmatched, or return).
- Match User/ User Name/ Matching Date: The system displays these columns’ data
automatically for information only.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 258 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Representatives Commission Calculation

Use: In this screen, users calculate the commissions that the representatives and their
supervisors deserve for a specific period as per the configuration of the Representatives
Commissions Coding screen. Then, authorized users approve the commissions and record
them in the general journal. Note that commissions can be calculated from this screen, or
from the Sales Invoices screen when issuing invoices after activating the Post
Representatives Commission upon issuing a Sales Invoice parameter on the
parameters screen. The system also allows using both screens together, for example giving
commission directly to the representative when issuing the sales invoice and a monthly
commission using the Representative Commissions Calculation screen.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Main Data
- Commission Type: In this field, users select the type of commission from the list that
is coded on the Representatives Commissions Coding screen.
- Document Number: In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable
number for the document that will be used for calculating the commission.
- Document Date: This field displays the date of entering the data of the document that
will be used in calculation. This date can be Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic
Cannot Be Modified, or Manual, according to the selected option in the Show Date
parameter on the Customers Management System Parameters screen.
- Reference Number: In this field, users can enter the reference number manually.

Enterprise Resource Planning 259 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- From Date/ To Date: In these fields, users enter the start and end dates of the period
over which the representatives’ commission will be calculated.
Second: Fetching Options
This tab is used to facilitate automatic filling in the detailed data section, as the system
fetches these data once users fill in the following:

- Representative Type/ To: In these fields, users press F9 to select the representative
types from the list.
- From Representative Number/ To: In these fields, users press F9 to select the range
of the representatives from a list.
- From Item Number/ To: In these fields, users press F9 to select the range of item
included from the list.
- From Group/ To: In these fields, users press F9 to select the range of groups from a
list.
- From Item Type/To: In these fields, users press F9 to select a range of items types
from the list.
Hint: In this tab, fields change according to the commission type
selected in the Main Data tab. For example, the fields of From Item,
To, From Group, To, From Item Type, and To, appear when users
select the By Item option in the Commission Type field on the
Representative Commission Coding screen within the customers'
system configuration.
- Show Zero Sales: When users tick this flag, the system displays the invoices in which
the prices of the sold items equal zero.
- Check Target Achievement for All Groups: This option appears on the
Representatives Commission Calculation screen when selecting the By Item Group
option in the Commission Type by Item field and Sales Plan option in the Use
Commissions Segments field on the Representatives Commissions Coding screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 260 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

By activating this option, the commission is calculated for the representatives when
achieving the target sales for all groups.
- Fetch Data: When users click on this button, the system displays the data in the
detailed fields automatically according to the data determined in the previously
explained fields.
Third: Detailed Data
Users can enter the detailed data manually without using the Fetching Options tab as
follows:

- Representative Number/ Name: In these columns, users press F9 to select the

number of the representative –for whom the commission will be calculated– from the
list.
- Item Number/ Item Name/ Unit: In the Item Number column, users select the item
number, for which the commission will be calculated, from the items list. Consequently,
the system displays the item name and unit of measurement. These columns appear
when users select the By Item option in the Commission Type by Item field in the
Representatives Commissions Coding screen within the customer system
configuration. The same applies when selecting the By Group or By Item Type
options.
- Net Sales: In this column, the system displays the Quantity and Value of the Net
Sales at each item level once users enter the item number. The number in this field is
the result of adding the net sales of the representative to the net sales of the
supervised sub-representative. However, when users do not calculate the commission
for each item separately, the total net sales of the representative appear.
- Commission Percentage: In this column, the system automatically displays the
representative commission of each item, as defined in the Representatives
Commissions Coding screen. However, when users do not calculate the commission

Enterprise Resource Planning 261 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

for each item separately, the system displays the total commission percentage for the
representative.
- Commission Amount: In this column, the system automatically displays the
representative’s commission value of each item separately, which equals net sales
multiplied by the representative commission percentage of each item. However, when
users do not calculate the commission for each item separately, the system displays
the total value of representative’s commission.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.
Hint: Since the method of calculating the commission for
Representatives, Marketeers, and Employees are identical, only the
method of calculating commission for representatives has been
explained to avoid duplication and wordiness.
Remark: Messages can be sent to customers –after calculating and
approving their commissions in the Customers Commissions
Calculation screen– provided that Customers Commissions
Calculation option is ticked in Document Type column in the Saving
Transactions Messages tab within Alerts Parameters screen under
the Assisting Systems.
- Approve Calculation: When users click on the Approve button on the toolbar, the
system displays the approval screen that the user can handle according to their
privilege. It should be noted that if the calculation is approved, the calculation result is
fetched into the journal entries screen to be charged to the required accounts.
- Used: This flag appears ticked when the commission calculation is fetched in the
Journal Entries screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 262 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Sales Contracts
Use: The organization management may need to sign a contract with the customer –when
providing certain items– including the data of the items such as quantities, prices,
customer’s discount amount, and the customer’s payments, dates, etc. The screen
documents these contracts and allows fetching their data to customer orders and rendering
them in the sales invoice(s).

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Master Data
- Branch: In this field, the system automatically displays the branch to which the user
logged in, with the possibility to modify it according to the granted privileges.
- Contract Type: In this field, users select the contract type from the list of the types
defined in the screen of Sales Contracts Types within the customers system
configuration.
- Document Sequence: In this field, the system displays the document sequence
according to the selected option in the Document Sequence field on the Customers
Management System Parameters screen; which can be Automatic Can Be
Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.
- Contract Status: In this field, users select one of two options; New Contract or
Renew Contract.

Enterprise Resource Planning 263 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Renewed from Contract: This field appears when users select the Renew Contract
option in the Contract Status field and is used to specify the sales contract that will be
renewed.
- Contract Number: In this field, users enter the contract number which can be the
number of the manual document, file number, or any other data used in the issuance
transaction or the search transaction.
- Date: This field displays the contract date according to the selected option in the Show
Date parameter on the Customer Management System Parameters screen;
Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.
- Tax Calculation Method: In this field, the system automatically displays the default
method for calculating the tax, this method changes once users select the customer to
become the one linked to the customer.
- Contract Start/ End Date: In these fields, users enter the beginning and end date of
the contract. Consequently, the system prevents using the contract outside the
specified period.
- Extension Expiry Date: In this field, the system automatically displays the extension
end date when users extend the contract period in the Period Extension tab.
- Customer Number/ Customer Name/ Currency: In the Customer Number field,
users press F9 to select the number of the customer, with whom the contract will be
made, from the customers list. Consequently, the system displays the data of the other
fields automatically.
- Exchange Rate: In this field, the exchange rate of the foreign currency into the local
currency appears, with the possibility of modification according to the limits specified in
the Currencies Setup screen.
- Reference Number: In this field, users enter the contract reference number, which can
be a digit or a letter. This number can be a manual document number, a file number,
or any other data that users use in the issuance or searching transactions. This field is
optional and it can be mandatory when users activate the Reference Number is
Mandatory parameter on the system parameters screen.
- Approval Status: In this field, the approval status appears automatically according to
the procedure that takes place while approving the contract; Unapproved, Approved,
Reject, or Return.

Enterprise Resource Planning 264 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Description: In this field, users enter an explanatory description of the contract. This
field is optional and it can be mandatory when users activate the Description is
Mandatory parameter on the system parameters screen.
- Price Type: This field includes two options; Price without Tax and Price Includes
Tax. The Price Includes Tax option appears automatically by default and changes
according to the price type specified for the customer on the Customers Data screen.
Second: Main Data

- Amount: In this field, the contract amount appears automatically after entering the
items and their details in the Items tab and saving the contract. If the Items tab is not
used, users enter the contract amount manually.
- Discount: In this field, users enter the discount amount on the contract value
manually.
- Advance Payment %: This field appears when users activate the Use Advance
Payment In Sales Contracts parameter on the customers system parameters screen.
In this field, users enter the percentage of the advance payment that the customer paid
from the contract. Consequently, based on this percentage, and after signing the
contract, and entering the payment data in the related tab, the system displays the
amount of the advance payment that will be paid.
Hint: When using the advance payment in the contract, users need to
enter the advance payment account number in the Accounts tab on the
Customers Data screen to save the sales contract. Otherwise, an alert
message will appear stating that the account needs to be entered.
- Total: This field automatically displays the total contract value, which is the contract
value after subtracting (the discount granted to the customer from the contract value +
the discount given to the customer at the item level, if any), and adding the tax amount
calculated according to the type of tax linked to the customer.

Enterprise Resource Planning 265 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Cost Center/ Project/ Activity: In these fields, users press F9 to determine the cost
center, project, and activity linked to the contract.
- Remarks: In this field, users clearly and accurately enter any remarks on the contract
to show the liabilities and terms that have no fields assigned to them across the screen
and its tabs.
- Alert Contract Expiry before: In this field, users enter the number of days before the
expiry date of the contract when the system needs to alert the user.
- Alert when Processed Amount is Less Than: In this field, users enter the contract
amount that when executed, the system alerts the user.
Third: Contract Conditions
In this tab, users press F9 to enter the contract conditions agreed upon by the organization
and customers. These conditions are coded on the Coding Sales Contracts Terms screen
under the customers system configuration.

Fourth: Items
In this section, users manually enter the data for the items provided by the organization to
the customers based on the contract. Users can fill in the fields that appear after clicking on
the Advanced Options button and click on the Fetch Data button to fetch the required
items' data.

- S/N: In this column, the system automatically generates a serial number as soon as
the user moves with the cursor in the Item Number column.

Enterprise Resource Planning 266 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Item Number/ Name: In the Item Number column, users press F9 to select the
number of the item that will be provided from the list. Consequently, the item name
appears in the Item Name column.
- Unit: In this column, if the item has one unit of measurement, it appears automatically
when users select the item number, otherwise, users will need to select the required
unit in this column.
- Item Type: In this column, the item type appears automatically upon selecting the
item.
- Quantity: In this column, users manually enter the item’s quantity that will be provided
to the customer.
- FOC Quantity: In this field, users manually enter the free-of-charge quantities of the
contract items, if any, according to the free-of-charge quantities policy.
- Price Includes Tax: In this column, the system automatically displays the price of the
item if it is priced on the Items Pricing screen. Otherwise, users will manually enter
the price of a single unit of the contract items.
- Discount: In this column, users manually enter the discount percentage for the item, if
any.
- Tax: In this column, the system automatically displays the specified tax rate for the
item.
- Total: In this column, the system displays the total, which equals (number of units
multiplied by the price of single unit).
- Description: In this column, users enter the description for the item provided that the
Display Description at Item Level parameter is activated within the system
parameters screen.
Totals Fields below the Tab:
- Items Discount: In this field, the system displays the total discount per item.
- Total Discount: In this field, the total discount appears automatically, which is the
discount per item in addition to the entered discount on the contract in the Main Data
tab.
- Tax: In this field, the system automatically displays the value of the tax imposed on the
items.

Enterprise Resource Planning 267 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Total: In this field, the system automatically displays the total of multiplying the
number of units by single unit price for all items.
- Net Amount: In this field, the system automatically displays the contract net amount,
which equals the contract value after subtracting the total discount and adding the
taxes amount.
Fifth: Concrete Specifications
This tab appears when users activate the Use Concrete Requests within the customers'
parameters screen. In this tab, users enter the concrete specifications when signing the
sales contract with customers.

Sixth: Additional Data

In this tab, users can add additional data to the contract that is not included across the
other screen tabs. Users can also rename these fields whenever needed using the Texts
Translation screen in the system’s general configuration.

Seventh: Period Extension

In this tab, the transactions of extending the contract period are documented, if it is required
to extend the contract for a certain period with the same terms and obligations stated in the
original contract.

Enterprise Resource Planning 268 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- S/N: In this column, the system automatically generates a serial number as soon as
users click on the Serial Number column.
- Renewal Date: In this column, users enter the renewal date manually.
- From Date: In this column, users enter the start date of the contract’s new period, this
date needs to be after the expiry date of the original contract.
- To Date: In this column, users enter the end date of the contract’s new period.
- Reference Number: In this field, users enter the contract reference number, which can
be a digit or letter. This number can be a manual document number, a file number, or
any other data that users use in the issuance and searching transactions. This field is
optional and it can be mandatory when users activate the Reference Number is
Mandatory parameter on the system parameters screen.
- Description: In this field, users enter an explanatory description of the contract
extension. This field is optional and it can be mandatory when users activate the
Description is Mandatory parameter on the parameter screen.
- Entered by: In this column, the system automatically displays the user who entered
the data of contract period extension for information purposes.
Eighth: Add Amount
In this tab, users record the additional amounts that have been added to the contract, if
any. It should be noted that these amounts are for information purposes and do not affect
the contract value.

- S/N: In this column, the system automatically generates a serial number as soon as
users click on the Serial Number column.
- Renewal Date: In this column, users enter the renewal date manually.
- Amount: In this column, users manually enter the amount that has been added.
- Reference Number: In this column, users enter the contract reference number, which
can be a digit or letter. This number can be a manual document number, a file
number, or any other data that users use in the issuance and searching transactions.

Enterprise Resource Planning 269 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

This field is optional and it can be mandatory when users activate the Reference
Number is Mandatory parameter on the system parameters screen.
- Description: In this field, users enter a clarifying statement of the contract. This field is
optional and it can be mandatory when users activate the Description is Mandatory
parameter on the system parameters screen.
- Entered By: In this column, the system displays the user who recorded the transaction
of adding an additional amount for information purposes.
Ninth: Batches Data
In this tab, users can divide the contract amount into monthly payments or periodic
payments, and issue a sales invoice for each payment accordingly.

This screen is used after clicking on the Modify button as follows:

- Number of Batches: In this field, users enter the number of payments, according to
which, the contract value will be distributed.
- Amount: In this field, the system automatically displays the contract value.
- Distribution Method: This field includes the following two options:
 Monthly: When users select this option, the number of payments will be the
number of months during which the contract amount will be paid. For example,
when users enter 10 in the Number of Batches field, the contract amount will be
distributed over 10 months only.
 Period in Days: When users select this option, they will need to determine the
number of days between payments.
- Number of Days: This field appears when users select the Period In Days option in
Distribution Method field. In this field, users enter the number of days between
payments.
- Batch Number: This column automatically displays the number of the batch according
to the number entered in the Number of Batches field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 270 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Date: This column automatically displays the due date of each payment based on the
selected distribution method; Monthly or Number of Days, with the possibility of
modification.
- Amount: The system divides the contract amount into payments according to the
specified number of batches, whether the period is Monthly or Number of Days. It
should be noted that the amounts can be modified provided that the total of these
amounts matches the total of contract’s amount. Moreover, when using advance
payments, the system displays it in the first cell of the Amount column, the
corresponding Advance Payment flag appears ticked, and then the rest of the amount
will be distributed over the remaining number of batches.
- Description: In this column, users enter an explanatory description for the
corresponding batch.
- Clear: Users click on this button to clear the selected payments to be deleted in order
to redistribute the contract amount and redetermine the due dates.
Remark: Users can preview a report on the due payments until a
certain date by ticking the Show Due Payment Batches flag on the
Sales Contracts Reports screen.
Tenth: Tax
In this tab, the system automatically displays the tax calculated on the item. On the left side,
the system displays Tax Type, Tax Rate, Tax Beneficiary, and Tax Amount. On the right
side, appears the tax data for each item.

Eleventh: Fetching Data

After clicking on the Add button, users can import sales contract data automatically using
the Fetching Data tab as follows:

Enterprise Resource Planning 271 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Fetch Data from: In this field, users select one of the following options:
 Purchase Order: When users select this option, they need to determine the
purchase order number, in the Number field, from the orders approved in the
Purchase Order screen. Consequently, the system displays the data in the sales
contract automatically and allows entering the rest of the contract data manually.
 Purchases Contracts Data: When users select this option, they need to determine
the purchase contract number, in the Number field, from contracts approved in the
Purchase Contracts screen. Consequently, the system displays the data in the
sales contract automatically and allows entering the rest of the contract data
manually.
Twelve: Import From Excel Sheet
- Excel File Path: The path is determined for each user in the Default Values tab on
the Users Data screen.
Formatting and Importing Excel File: Users format the Excel worksheet according to the
format adopted by the system, and then import data, unless there is an issue that prevents
importing data.

- Docs Archive: Users can click on this button on the toolbar to archive the sales
contracts under a separate folder after defining it.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.
- Contract Approval: Users click on the Approval button on the toolbar to display the
approval screen and handle it according to the privilege granted to them. It should be
noted that once approving the sales contract, it can be fetched to the receipt voucher.

Enterprise Resource Planning 272 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Distribute Coupons to Representatives

Use: On this screen, users document distributing the coupons among the sales
representatives to be sold to the customers who will use them.

Screen Use Method

The screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Basic Data
- Branch Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the branch in which
the user entered with the possibility to modify it according to the privileges granted to
the user.
- Transaction Sequence: This field handles the document serial number according to
the selected option in the Document Sequence parameter on the parameters screen;
which can be Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or
Manual.
- Date: This field handles the date according to the selected option in the Show Date
parameter on the parameters screen; which can be Automatic Can Be Modified,
Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.
- Coupon Type: In this field, users select the coupon type either Coupons Book or
Coupons, and the columns in the detailed data section will change accordingly.
- Representative Number/ Name: In the Representative Number field, users press F9
to select the number of the representative to which coupons will be distributed from the
list.
- Recipient Name: In this field, users manually enter the name of coupon recipient.

Enterprise Resource Planning 273 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Reference Number: In this field, users manually enter the reference number, which
can be a manual document number or a file number and can include digits, letters, or
both, and the organization uses it for archiving.
- Description: In this field, users manually enter a clear description stating the content
of the coupon distribution or any other data needed when auditing.
Second: Additional Data
In this tab, users enter additional data about the distribution of coupons that are not
included in the rest of the screen tabs. Users can rename these fields whenever needed
using the Texts Translation screen in the system’s general configuration. This data is used
in the various reports on coupons.

Third: Fetching Options

In this tab, users specify the numbers of the coupons or coupons' books that will be given to
a particular representative and then click on the Fetch Data button. Consequently, the
system displays the coupons’ data automatically according to the coupon type in the
detailed data.

Fourth: Detailed Data

When users click on the Fetch Data button in the Fetching Options tab, the system
displays the data of the coupons or coupon books in the detailed data, as follows:
- S/N: In this column, the system displays automatic serial numbers at the level of
coupon or coupons book.
- Book Number: In this column, the system automatically displays the numbers of
coupons book specified in the Book Number and To fields within the Fetching
Options tab.
- Price: In this column, the system displays the default selling price for the determined
coupon/ coupon book based on the Coupons Coding screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 274 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Issuance Date/ Expiry Date: The system displays the data of these fields
automatically.
- Sold: The system automatically displays this flag ticked for the coupons/ coupons book
that have been sold in the Coupons Sales screen.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 275 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Return Coupons from Representatives

Use: On this screen, users record the coupons returned from the representatives and could
not be sold to the target customers.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Basic Data
- Branch Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the branch that the
user entered, and can be modified according to the privilege granted to the system
user.
- Transaction Sequence: This field handles the document serial number according to
the selected option in the Document Sequence parameter on the parameters screen;
which can be Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or
Manual.
- Date: This field handles the date of returning the coupon based on the selected option
in the Show Date parameter on the parameters screen; which can be Automatic Can
Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.
- Coupon Type: In this field, the user selects the coupon type (Coupon or
Coupons Book) from the list, and the columns in the detailed data will change
accordingly.
- Representative Number/ Name: In the Representative Number field, users press F9
to select the number of the representative who will return the coupons. Consequently,
the representative name appears in the Representative Name field.

Enterprise Resource Planning 276 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Recipient's Name: In this field, users enter the name of the coupon recipient
manually.
- Reference Number: In this field, users manually enter the number of the reference,
which can be a manual document or file number and can include digits, letters, or
both. The organization uses this number for archiving purposes to refer back to.
- Description: In this field, users enter a clear description stating the coupon’s return
data and any other data required for auditing.
Second: Additional Data
In this tab, users enter any additional data about the coupons return that cannot be included
in the other screen tabs. In this tab, users can also rename these fields using the Texts
Translation screen in the system’s general configuration. The data in this tab can be used
in the reports generated on coupons.

Third: Fetching Options

In this tab, users specify the numbers of coupons book that will be returned from a
particular representative and then click on the Fetch Data button. Consequently, the system
displays the coupons’ data automatically in the detailed data.

Fourth: Detailed Data

When users click on the Fetch Data button in the Fetching Options tab, the system
displays the data of the coupon books that will be returned in the detailed data, as follows:
- S/N: In this column, the system displays automatic serial numbers at the level of
coupons book.
- Book Number: In this column, the system automatically displays the coupons book
specified in the Book Number and To fields in the Fetch Options tab.
- Price: In this column, the system automatically displays the default selling price of the
specified coupon or coupons book based on the Coupons Coding screen.

Enterprise Resource Planning 277 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Issuance/ Expiry Date: The system automatically displays the data of these fields.
- Sold: The system automatically displays this flag ticked for the sold coupon book(s) or
coupon(s).
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.

Enterprise Resource Planning 278 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Coupons Sales
Use: On this screen, users record the coupons that have been sold to the customers by the
sales representatives of the organization. It should be noted that the data of the sold
coupons appear in the Coupons tab on the Sales Invoices screen when users select the
Coupon option in the Payment Method field.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used after clicking on the Add button as follows:
First: Main Data
- Branch Number: In this field, the system automatically displays the branch in which
the user entered with the possibility to modify it according to the privileges granted to
the system user.
- Document Number: This field handles document’s serial number according to the
selected option in the Document Sequence parameter on the system parameters
screen; which can be Automatic Can Be Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified,
or Manual.
- Date: This field handles the date based on the selected option in the Show Date
parameter on the system parameters screen; which can be Automatic Can Be
Modified, Automatic Cannot Be Modified, or Manual.
- Customer Number/ Name: In the Customer Number field, users press F9 to select
the number of the customer to whom the coupons were sold from the customer list.
Consequently, the customer’s name appears automatically.
- Currency: In this field, users select the currency of the coupons from the list.

Enterprise Resource Planning 279 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Exchange Rate: In this field, the rate of exchanging the foreign currency into the local
currency appears, with the possibility of modification according to the limits specified on
the Currencies Setup screen.
- Reference Number: In this field, users manually enter the number of the reference,
which can be a manual document or file number and can include digits, letters, or
both. The organization uses this number for archiving to refer back to.
- Recipient Name: In this field, users manually enter the name of the coupon recipient.
- Description In this field, the system automatically displays a modifiable description.
- Payment Method: In this field, users select the payment method from the options of:
Cash, Check, or On Credit.
- Cash Number: This field appears when users select the Cash option in the Payment
Method field. The name of this field changes into Bank Number when users select the
Check option in the Payment Method field. Meanwhile, when users select the Credit
option in the Payment Method field, the system makes the Customer field mandatory.
- Representative Number: In this field, users press F9 to select the number of the
representative who sells the coupon from the list that appears.
- Coupon Type: In this field, users select the coupon type (Coupons Book or Coupon)
from the list, and the columns in the detailed data will change accordingly.
- Center/ Project/ Activity Number: These fields are optional. Here, users specify, if
necessary, the center number, project number, and activity number from the list after
pressing F9.
Second: Additional Data
In this tab, users enter any additional data on the coupons sales that cannot be included in
the other screen tabs. In this tab, users can also rename these fields using the Texts
Translation screen in the system’s general configuration. The data in this tab can be used
in the reports generated on coupons.

Enterprise Resource Planning 280 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Third: Fetching Options

In this tab, users specify the numbers of the coupons or book coupons sold by a particular
representative according to the selected coupon type in the main data. Then, users click on
the Fetch data button. Consequently, the system displays the coupons data automatically in
the detailed data section.

Fourth: Detailed Data

When users click on the Fetch Data button in the Fetching Options tab, the system
displays the data of the sold coupons or coupon books in the detailed data, as follows:
- S/N: In this column, the system displays automatic serial numbers at the level of each
book.
- Book Number: In this column, the system automatically displays the number of the
coupons book specified in the Book Number and To fields in the Fetch Options tab.
- Price: In this column, the system displays the default selling price for the specified
coupons book/ coupon based on the Coupons Coding screen.
- Tax: In this column, the system displays the tax amount according to the percentage
specified for the tax in the Coupons Types screen when users select the Items
Replacement option in the Coupon Using Method field.
- Issuance/ Expiry Date: In these columns, the system automatically displays the
issuance and expiry dates of the coupons according to the specified data on the
Coupons Data screen.
- Description: In this column, users enter an appropriate explanatory description for the
selling transaction of the coupons book or coupon.
- Used: The system displays this flag ticked for the coupon books or the coupons that
are used in the sales invoices.
- Deactivation/ Suspending User/ Deactivation Date: Users can tick Deactivation flag
to stop using a specific coupon(s) or coupon book(s) in the sales invoices for any
reason. Consequently, the system displays the date of the deactivation and the name
of the user who did it.

Enterprise Resource Planning 281 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

- Totals: The system automatically displays the total coupon sales, tax, discount, and
grand total within the fields that appear at the bottom of the screen.
- Save: Users save data after completing data entry.
The Entry of the Coupons Sales Transaction: When users save the sale transaction, the
system creates a financial entry to record the coupons sales transaction, in which the debit
side is the payment method and the credit side is the intermediary account of the coupon
sales as follows:
From/ Cash/ Bank/ Customer Account (based on the payment method)
To/ Coupons Sales Intermediary Account

Enterprise Resource Planning 282 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Link Invoice to Loyalty Customer

Use: The screen is used to link the cash sales invoices to a loyalty program customer if the
invoice is cash and is not linked to a cash customer linked to a loyalty program system.
Then, the points are calculated for this customer.

Screen Use Method

In Invoice Number field, users press F9 key to display all cash sales invoices and select
the invoice that will be linked to a cash customer (added in cash customer data). Once the
invoice is selected, its data appear, and the cursor will move to Mobile Number field so
users enter the customer's mobile number or they move to the Customer Number field to
fill it in.
- Save: After linking the invoice to the cash customer, users can save data.

Enterprise Resource Planning 283 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Approve Override Discounts Requests

Use: On this screen, authorized users can approve requests for overriding discounts
entered in the sales invoices if the discount percentage that will be granted to the customer
is beyond the user's privileges. In the sales invoice, users use the Discount Percentage
field to display a screen in which the request to override the discount is entered in order to
be approved by the authorized user on this screen according to the privileges granted to
them.

Screen Use Method

This screen is used for approving the users’ requests for overriding the discount percentage
as follows:
First: Master Data
- Branch: In this field, users select the branch by which the requests were submitted in
order to be approved.
- User Number: This field is used to select the user by whom requests were entered
and will be approved.
- From Number/ To Number/ From Date/ To Date: In these fields, users filter and
select the required documents and period.
- Approval Status: In this field, users determine the documents that will be displayed in
the detailed data. This field includes the options of Approved, Unapproved, Reject,
and Return.
- F8/ Display: After entering data in the previous fields, users click on the View button
or press the F8 button to display the requests in the detailed data. It should be noted

Enterprise Resource Planning 284 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

that users can click on the View button without entering any data to display all
documents.
Second: Detailed Data
Once users click on the View button or press the F8 button, the documents are displayed in
detailed data section in order to enter the approved discount percentage by the authorized
user. It should be noted that any document can be displayed by clicking the button
corresponding to it.
- Modify/ Save: After completing entering data, users click on the Modify button and
save the transaction.
- Approval: On the toolbar, users use the Approval button to approve, reject, or return
the overriding request.

Enterprise Resource Planning 285 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Chapter Four
Reports

Enterprise Resource Planning 286 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Introduction
The information system outputs are the outcome on which the
organization management relies in the decision-making upon dealing
with the different scenarios. Reports and outputs constitute the ultimate
goal of using the information system, and in many cases, they constitute
the main motive for the organization to purchase and use the
information system, which is expected to provide various reports that
include indicators and information that fulfill the needs and requirements
of the organization's management. Moreover, this information enables
making the right decision to enhance and develop the organization’s
policies at multiple levels and across different departments, which in
return ensures achieving the goals of using the system.
It is worth mentioning that the Onyx Pro system provides a unified
mechanism for displaying and printing reports explained in the Onyx
ERP Basics User Guide. Users can also refer back to the guide to learn
more about this mechanism.

Enterprise Resource Planning 287 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Customers Management System Reports

First: Inputs Reports
Regions Data Reports

Collectors Data Reports

Sales Representatives Data Reports

Customers Data Reports

Enterprise Resource Planning 288 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Second: Transactions Reports

Customers Opening Balances Reports

Customers Account Statement Report

The system generates an account statement for each customer including indebtedness
amounts and paid amounts during a specific period.

Customers Debts Ages Reports

It is one of the key reports generated by the system and it includes multiple options. This
report type displays the customer’s indebtedness and how it will be paid during the debt
age (thru one month, two, three, four, or more). When users determine the debts’ age
range, the system displays the details of the invoices of the indebtedness. The debit aging
can be printed based on the representative(s); also, collect ages can be printed based on
the representative(s) using the same mechanism when generating reports on debt ages for
the representatives. It should be noted that the Include Journal Entries flag appears when

Enterprise Resource Planning 289 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

users select the Collection Ages option in the Report Type field. Moreover, the debt ages
reports can be generated based on the main customer, and it will include all the movements
of the sub-customers under the main customer.
The mechanism of debt ages and customers debts: When there are invoices that have
sales return, the invoice amount will be reduced by the return amount. Noting that if the
return is paid on credit, to an account, or via network, only the percentage of the credit
amount is deducted from the total amount of the invoice; and this applies if the system does
not use multiple cost centers, projects, or activities.
Remark: The customer's account statement can be recalled from the
summary or detailed debt age report.
Customers Debt Age Report (Summary)

Customers Debt Age Report (Detailed)

Collectors Movements Report

Enterprise Resource Planning 290 Go to ➔ Contents

Customers Management System (Onyx ERP)

Commissions Report (Representatives, Collectors, Customers, or Employees)

Contracts Data Report

Enterprise Resource Planning 291 Go to ➔ Contents